Patent Application
20190083862
The present disclosure relates to a golf club head, and more specifically to a golf club head having an adjustable weighting system.
Various characteristics of a golf club can affect the performance of the golf club. For example, the center of gravity and the moment of inertia of the golf club head are characteristics that can affect performance.
The center of gravity and moment of inertia of the golf club head are functions of the distribution of mass of the golf club head. In particular, distributing mass of the club head to be closer to a sole portion of the club head, closer to a strike face of the club head, and/or closer to a toe portion and heel portion of the club head can alter the center of gravity and/or the moment of inertia of the club head. Altering the moment of inertia of the club head can in turn alter the forgiveness of the golf club, flight direction of the golf ball, and/or flight angle of the golf ball.
Many weighting systems in current golf club heads require bulky and complex internal structures that reduce club head moment of inertia and move the club head center of gravity up (toward the crown) and forward (toward the face). There is a need in the art for a club head that provides user adjustability of club head weighting and center of gravity position to affect ball flight (trajectory and/or spin), without negatively impacting moment of inertia or center of gravity position.
Described herein are various embodiments of golf club heads having adjustable weighting systems. The adjustable weighting systems include a plurality of discrete attachment locations capable of receiving one or more weights. Each weight can be coupled to and shifted between any of the discrete attachment locations on the club head. Accordingly, the adjustable weighting system provides user adjustability of club head weighting and center of gravity position to change ball flight (i.e. ball spin or trajectory).
In many embodiments, the adjustable weighting systems described herein protrude from the external contour of the club head, or are minimally insert from the external contour of the club head. Further, in many embodiments the adjustable weighting systems described herein are positioned near the perimeter of the club head. The positioning of the adjustable weighting systems maximizes perimeter weighting and low and back weight positioning, thereby maximizing club head moment of inertia for forgiveness on off-center hits and positioning the club head center of gravity low and back to increase launch angle and reduce backspin. Accordingly, the golf club heads described herein provide user adjustability of club head center of gravity to adjust ball flight, while maintaining optimal design and performance characteristics (high moment of inertia and low and back center of gravity position).
Many embodiments described herein include adjustable weighting systems having one or more platforms, ledges, recesses or channels, without requiring significant internal structures that would adversely affect moment of inertia and head center of gravity position.
The terms “first,” “second,” “third,” “fourth,” and the like in the description and in the claims, if any, are used for distinguishing between similar elements and not necessarily for describing a particular sequential or chronological order. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances such that the embodiments described herein are, for example, capable of operation in sequences other than those illustrated or otherwise described herein. Furthermore, the terms “include,” and “have,” and any variations thereof, are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, such that a process, method, system, article, device, or apparatus that comprises a list of elements is not necessarily limited to those elements, but may include other elements not expressly listed or inherent to such process, method, system, article, device, or apparatus.
The terms “left,” “right,” “front,” “back,” “top,” “bottom,” “over,” “under,” and the like in the description and in the claims, if any, are used for descriptive purposes and not necessarily for describing permanent relative positions. It is to be understood that the terms so used are interchangeable under appropriate circumstances such that the embodiments of the apparatus, methods, and/or articles of manufacture described herein are, for example, capable of operation in other orientations than those illustrated or otherwise described herein.
The terms “couple,” “coupled,” “couples,” “coupling,” and the like should be broadly understood and refer to connecting two or more elements, mechanically or otherwise. Coupling (whether mechanical or otherwise) may be for any length of time, e.g., permanent or semi-permanent or only for an instant.
Other features and aspects will become apparent by consideration of the following detailed description and accompanying drawings. Before any embodiments of the disclosure are explained in detail, it should be understood that the disclosure is not limited in its application to the details or embodiment and the arrangement of components as set forth in the following description or as illustrated in the drawings. The disclosure is capable of supporting other embodiments and of being practiced or of being carried out in various ways. It should be understood that the description of specific embodiments is not intended to limit the disclosure from covering all modifications, equivalents and alternatives falling within the spirit and scope of the disclosure. Also, it is to be understood that the phraseology and terminology used herein is for the purpose of description and should not be regarded as limiting.
For ease of discussion and understanding, and for purposes of description only, the following detailed description illustrates golf club heads 100, 110, 210, 310, 410, 510, 610, 710, 810, 910, 1010, 1110, 1210, 1310, 1410, 1510, 1610, 1710, 1810, 1910, 2010, 2110, 2210, 2310, 2410, 2510, 2610, 2710, 3010, 3210, 3310, 3410, 3510, 3610, 3710, 3810, 3910, 4010, 4110, 4210, 4310, 4410, 4510, 4610, 4710, 4810, 4910, 5010, 5110, 5210, 5310, 5410, 5510, 5610, 5710, 5810, 5910, 6010, 6110, 6210, 6310, 6410, 6510, 6610, 6710, 6810, 11010, 12010, and 13010 as woods. It should be appreciated that the woods are provided for purposes of illustration of one or more embodiments of the adjustable weighting systems as disclosed herein. However, the disclosed embodiments of the adjustable weighting systems can be used on any desired wood, iron, hybrid, or other golf club where adjustable weighting is desired. For example, the club head may include, but is not limited to, a driver, a fairway wood, a hybrid, a one-iron, a two-iron, a three-iron, a four-iron, a five-iron, a six-iron, a seven-iron, an eight-iron, a nine-iron, a pitching wedge, a gap wedge, a utility wedge, a sand wedge, a lob wedge, and/or a putter.
The golf club head 100 also includes a hosel 42 having a hosel axis 46 (shown in
In many embodiments, the golf club head 100 comprises a driver-type club head. In these embodiments, the loft angle of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 16 degrees, less than approximately 15 degrees, less than approximately 14 degrees, less than approximately 13 degrees, less than approximately 12 degrees, less than approximately 11 degrees, or less than approximately 10 degrees. Further, in these embodiments, the volume of the club head 100 can be greater than approximately 400 cc, greater than approximately 425 cc, greater than approximately 450 cc, greater than approximately 475 cc, greater than approximately 500 cc, greater than approximately 525 cc, greater than approximately 550 cc, greater than approximately 575 cc, greater than approximately 600 cc, greater than approximately 625 cc, greater than approximately 650 cc, greater than approximately 675 cc, or greater than approximately 700 cc. In some embodiments, the volume of the club head can be approximately 400 cc-600 cc, approximately 500 cc-600 cc, approximately 500 cc-650 cc, approximately 550 cc-700 cc, approximately 600 cc-650 cc, approximately 600 cc-700 cc, or approximately 600 cc-800 cc.
In some embodiments, the club head can comprise a fairway wood-type club head. In these embodiments, the loft angle of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 35 degrees, less than approximately 34 degrees, less than approximately 33 degrees, less than approximately 32 degrees, less than approximately 31 degrees, or less than approximately 30 degrees. Further, in these embodiments, the loft angle of the club head 100 can be greater than approximately 12 degrees, greater than approximately 13 degrees, greater than approximately 14 degrees, greater than approximately 15 degrees, greater than approximately 16 degrees, greater than approximately 17 degrees, greater than approximately 18 degrees, greater than approximately 19 degrees, or greater than approximately 20 degrees. Further, in these embodiments, the volume of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 400 cc, less than approximately 375 cc, less than approximately 350 cc, less than approximately 325 cc, less than approximately 300 cc, less than approximately 275 cc, less than approximately 250 cc, less than approximately 225 cc, or less than approximately 200 cc. For example, the volume of the club head can be approximately 300 cc-400 cc, approximately 325 cc-400 cc, approximately 350 cc-400 cc, approximately 250 cc-400 cc, approximately 250-350 cc, or approximately 275-375 cc.
In some embodiments, the club head can comprise a hybrid type club head. In these embodiments, the loft angle of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 40 degrees, less than approximately 39 degrees, less than approximately 38 degrees, less than approximately 37 degrees, less than approximately 36 degrees, less than approximately 35 degrees, less than approximately 34 degrees, less than approximately 33 degrees, less than approximately 32 degrees, less than approximately 31 degrees, or less than approximately 30 degrees. Further, in these embodiments, the loft angle of the club head 100 can be greater than approximately 16 degrees, greater than approximately 17 degrees, greater than approximately 18 degrees, greater than approximately 19 degrees, greater than approximately 20 degrees, greater than approximately 21 degrees, greater than approximately 22 degrees, greater than approximately 23 degrees, greater than approximately 24 degrees, or greater than approximately 25 degrees. Further, in these embodiments, the volume of the club head 100 can be less than approximately 200 cc, less than approximately 175 cc, less than approximately 150 cc, less than approximately 125 cc, less than approximately 100 cc, or less than approximately 75 cc. For example, the volume of the club head can be approximately 100 cc-150 cc, approximately 75 cc-150 cc, approximately 100 cc-125 cc, or approximately 75 cc-125 cc. In other embodiments, the golf club head 100 can comprise any type of golf club head.
A plurality of grooves or primary grooves 40 (shown in
The club head 100 defines a loft plane 10102 tangent to the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38. The club head 100 further defines a coordinate system having an origin located at the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38. The coordinate system has an x′ axis 10106, a y′ axis 10104, and a z′ axis 10108. The x′ axis 10106 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38 in a direction from the heel 22 to the toe 18 of the club head 100. The y′ axis 10104 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38 in a direction from the crown 26 to the sole 30 of the club head 100 and perpendicular to the x′ axis 10106. The z′ axis 10108 extends through the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38 in a direction from the face 38 to the back end 34 of the club head 100 and is perpendicular to the x′ axis 10106 and the y′ axis 10104.
The coordinate system defines an x′y′ plane 10124 extending through the x′ axis 10106 and the y′ axis 10104; an x′z′ plane 10126 extending through the x′ axis 10106 and the z′ axis 10108; and a y′z′ plane 10128 extending through the y′ axis 10104 and the z′ axis 10108, wherein the x′y′ plane 10124, the x′z′ plane 10126, and the y′z′ plane 10128 are all perpendicular to one another and intersect at the origin of the coordinate system located at the geometric center 140 of the strikeface 38. The x′y′ plane 10124 extends parallel to the hosel axis 46 and is positioned at an angle corresponding to the loft angle of the club head 100 from the loft plane 10102. Further, the x′ axis 10106 is positioned at a 60 degree angle to the hosel axis 46 when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the x′y′ plane 10124.
In these or other embodiments, the club head 100 can be viewed from a front view (
Referring to
As shown in
For additional guidance in describing the innovation herein, the x-axis 54 and the z-axis 62 are arranged to coincide with numbers on an analog clock in
Various golf club head parameters are important in achieving desired performance characteristics, such as club head moment of inertia, club head center of gravity position, and club head center of gravity adjustability. High club head moment of inertia results in increased club head forgiveness for off-center hits. A club head center of gravity positioned low and back (i.e. toward the sole and rear of the club head) beneficially increases moment of inertia, reduces backspin, and increases launch angle of a golf ball on impact. Club head center of gravity adjustability allows for desired trajectory tuning of a club head by an end user. Each of these parameters are important in golf club design to achieve desired or optimal performance characteristics. However, including all of these parameters on a golf club head presents a design challenge, as many current center of gravity adjustability mechanisms (1) lower club head moment of inertia and/or (2) shift the club head center of gravity up and toward the front of the club head due to internal and/or bulky weight structures, and/or non-optimal weight structure positioning.
The embodiments of the golf club heads described below include adjustable weighting systems while maintaining or preventing a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning. For example, many embodiments below describe low profile adjustable weighting systems and/or optimally positioned adjustable weighting systems to maintain a high club head moment of inertia and low and back club head center of gravity position, similar to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system, while providing user adjustability of ball flight and/or trajectory. Maintaining a high club head moment of inertia about the club head CG results in increased forgiveness for off-center hits, and maintaining a high club head moment if inertia about the hosel axis results in increased rotational stability during a swing. Further, maintaining a low and back club head center of gravity beneficially increases club head moment of inertia about the head CG and reduces backspin.
The club head 100 comprises a moment of inertia about the x-axis Ixx (i.e. crown-to-sole moment of inertia), a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy (i.e. heel-to-toe moment of inertia), and a moment of inertia about the hosel axis 46 Ihh.
The club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a moment of inertia about the x-axis Ixx greater than 3100 g·cm2, greater than 3200 g·cm2, greater than 3300 g·cm2, greater than 3400 g·cm2, greater than 3500 g·cm2, greater than 3600 g·cm2, greater than 3700 g·cm2, greater than 3800 g·cm2, greater than 3900 g·cm2, greater than 4000 g·cm2, greater than 4100 g·cm2, greater than 4200 g·cm2, greater than 4300 g·cm2, greater than 4400 g·cm2, or greater than 4500 g·cm2. In some embodiments, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein have a moment of inertia about the x-axis Ixx between 3100 and 4000 g·cm2, between 3100 and 3800 g·cm2, between 3200 and 4000 g·cm2, between 3200 and 4000 g·cm2, between 3300 and 4000 g·cm2, between 3400 and 4000 g·cm2, or between 3500 and 4000 g·cm2.
Further, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy greater than 4700 g·cm2, greater than 4800 g·cm2, greater than 4900 g·cm2, greater than 5000 g·cm2, greater than 5100 g·cm2, greater than 5200 g·cm2, greater than 5300 g·cm2, greater than 5400 g·cm2, greater than 5500 g·cm2, greater than 5600 g·cm2, greater than 5700 g·cm2, greater than 5800 g·cm2, greater than 5900 g·cm2, or greater than 6000 g·cm2. In some embodiments, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein have a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy between 4800 and 6000 g·cm2, between 4900 and 6000 g·cm2, between 5000 and 6000 g·cm2, between 5100 and 6000 g·cm2, between 5200 and 6000 g·cm2, between 5300 and 6000 g·cm2, or between 5400 and 6000 g·cm2.
Further still, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a moment of inertia about the hosel-axis Ihh greater than 7500 g·cm2, greater than 8000 g·cm2, greater than 8250 g·cm2, greater than 8500 g·cm2, greater than 8750 g·cm2, greater than 9000 g·cm2, greater than 9050 g·cm2, or greater than 10000 g·cm2. In some embodiments, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein have a moment of inertia about the hosel-axis Ihh between 7500 and 10000 g·cm2, between 8000 and 10000 g·cm2, between 8500 and 10000 g·cm2, or between 9000 and 10000 g·cm2.
Referring to Relation 1 below, many embodiments of the club heads with adjustable weighting systems comprise a combined moment of inertia about the head CG (MOICG) defined as the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis and the moment of inertia about the y-axis.
MOICG=Ixx+Iyy Relation 1
The combined moment of inertia about the head center of gravity MOICG can be greater than 7600 g·in2, greater than 7700 g·cm2, greater than 7800 g·cm2, greater than 7900 g·cm2, greater than 8000 g·cm2, greater than 8100 g·cm2, greater than 8200 g·cm2, greater than 8300 g·cm2, greater than 8400 g·cm2, greater than 8500 g·cm2, greater than 8600 g·cm2, greater than 8700 g·cm2, greater than 8800 g·cm2, greater than 8900 g·cm2, greater than 9000 g·cm2, greater than 9100 g·cm2, greater than 9200 g·cm2, or greater than 9300 g·cm2. For example, the combined moment of inertia about the club head head center of gravity MOICG can be between 7700 and 9500 g·cm2, between 7800 and 9500 g·cm2, between 7900 and 9500 g·cm2, between 8000 and 9500 g·cm2, between 8100 and 9500 g·cm2, between 8200 and 9500 g·cm2, or between 8300 and 9500 g·cm2.
Referring to Relation 2 below, many embodiments of the club heads with adjustable weighting systems comprise a combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel (MOICG-H), defined as the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis, the moment of inertia about the y-axis, and the moment of inertia about the hosel axis.
MOICG-H=Ixx+Iyy+Ihh Relation 2
The combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be greater than 14800 g·cm2, greater than 14900 g·cm2, greater than 15000 g·cm2, greater than 15100 g·cm2, greater than 15200 g·cm2, greater than 15300 g·cm2, greater than 15400 g·cm2, greater than 15500 g·cm2, greater than 15600 g·cm2, greater than 15700 g·cm2, greater than 15800 g·cm2, greater than 15900 g·cm2, greater than 16000 g·cm2, greater than 16200 g·cm2, greater than 16400 g·cm2, greater than 16600 g·cm2, greater than 16800 g·cm2, greater than 17000 g·cm2, greater than 17200 g·cm2, greater than 17400 g·cm2, greater than 17600 g·cm2, greater than 17800 g·cm2, greater than 18000 g·cm2, greater than 18400 g·cm2, greater than 18800 g·cm2, greater than 19000 g·cm2, greater than 19200 g·cm2, or greater than 19400 g·cm2. For example, the combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be between 15000 and 19500 g·cm2, between 15000 and 19000 g·cm2, between 15000 and 18000 g·cm2, between 16000 and 19500 g·cm2, between 16000 and 19000 g·cm2, or between 16000 and 18000 g·cm2. In these embodiments, the combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be greater than 15000 g·cm2 for club heads with adjustable weighting systems having a volume between 425 and 450 cubic centimeters (cc), and the combined moment of inertia about the head CG and hosel MOICG-H can be greater than 17000 g·cm2 for club heads with adjustable weighting systems having a volume between 450 and 500 cubic centimeters (cc).
The club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a head CG depth 10130 greater than 1.6 inches, greater than 1.65 inches, greater than 1.7 inches, greater than 1.75 inches, greater than 1.8 inches, greater than 1.85 inches, greater than 1.9 inches, greater than 1.95 inches, or greater than 2.0 inches. For example, the club head having the adjustable weighting systems can have a head CG depth 10130 between 1.61 and 2.0 inches, between 1.65 and 2.0 inches, between 1.7 and 2.0 inches, between 1.8 and 2.0 inches, between 1.61 and 3.0 inches, between 1.65 and 3.0 inches, between 1.7 and 3.0 inches, between 1.8 and 3.0 inches, between 1.9 and 3.0 inches, or between 2.0 and 3.0 inches.
Further, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a head CG height 10132 located below the head depth plane 10120 (i.e. located between the head depth plane 10120 and the sole 30 of the club head). Further, the club heads comprising the adjustable weighting systems described herein can have a head CG height 10132 located within 0.10 inch, within 0.09 inch, within 0.08 inch, within 0.07 inch, within 0.06 inch, within 0.05 inch, or within 0.04 inch of the head depth plane 10120 toward the crown 26 or toward the sole 30 of the club head.
In many embodiments, the adjustable weight system includes one or more weights that are repositionable to a plurality of discrete portions or attachment locations of the club head to adjust the head CG position. Adjusting the head CG position using the adjustable weight systems described herein can affect ball trajectory and/or spin characteristics of the club head at impact, while maintaining a high club head moment of inertia.
In many embodiments, the adjustable weighting system can comprise two or more discrete attachment locations for receiving the one or more weights. In many embodiments, the adjustable weight system includes two, three, four, or five discrete attachment locations. For example, in embodiments of the adjustable weighting system having two discrete attachment locations, the attachment locations can include a first attachment location positioned toward the back end 34 and the toe 18 and a second attachment location positioned toward the back end 24 and the heel 22 of the club head. In these embodiments, a distance between the first attachment location and the second attachment location can be greater than 0.8 inch, greater than 0.9 inch, greater than 1.0 inch, greater than 1.1 inches, greater than 1.2 inches, or greater than 1.3 inches. For example, the distance between the first attachment location and the second attachment location can be between 0.8-1.3 inches, between 0.9-1.3 inches, between 1.0-1.3 inches, or between 1.1-1.3 inches.
For further example, in embodiments of the adjustable weighting system having three discrete attachment locations (e.g.
In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system can include any number of discrete attachment locations greater than one, such as, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, or more discrete attachment locations. In embodiments where the adjustable weighting system includes four discrete attachment locations, a distance between adjacent attachment locations can be greater than 0.4 inch, greater than 0.5 inch, greater than 0.6 inch, greater than 0.7 inch, greater than 0.8 inch, or greater than 0.9 inch. For example, in embodiments including four discrete attachment locations, the distance between adjacent attachment locations can be between 0.4-0.9 inch, between 0.5-0.9 inch, between 0.6-0.9 inch, or between 0.7-0.9 inch. In embodiments where the adjustable weighting system includes five discrete attachment locations, a distance between adjacent attachment locations can be greater than 0.3 inch, greater than 0.4 inch, greater than 0.5 inch, greater than 0.6 inch, greater than 0.7 inch, or greater than 0.8 inch. For example, in embodiments including four discrete attachment locations, the distance between adjacent attachment locations can be between 0.3-0.8 inch, between 0.4-0.8 inch, between 0.5-0.8 inch, or between 0.6-0.8 inch.
The plurality of discrete attachment locations of the club heads having adjustable weighting systems described herein can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. In many embodiments having apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, the fastener can comprise the same material as the body, or a material having a lighter density than the body, such that the fastener does not contribute to the adjustable weighting properties of the club head. Further, in some embodiments, the apertures or recesses or ports can be threaded to receive a threaded fastener. In many embodiments, the adjustable weighting system is devoid of multiple and/or deep ports or recesses that require significant internal structure required to secure one or more weights within the ports or recesses.
The adjustable weighting system further comprises one or more weights positionable at the plurality of discrete attachment locations. The one or more weights can have a height 10152 measured in a crown to sole direction, parallel to the y-axis 58, when the weight is coupled to one or more of the attachment locations, a width 10154 measured in a heel to toe direction, parallel to the x-axis 54, when the weight is coupled to one or more of the attachment locations, and a depth 10156 measured in a front to back direction, parallel to the z-axis 62, when the weight is coupled to one or more of the attachment locations. In many embodiments, the height 10152 can be less than 0.5 inch, less than 0.4 inch, less than 0.3 inch, less than 0.25 inch, less than 0.2 inch, less than 0.18 inch, less than 0.16 inch, less than 0.14 inch, less than 0.12 inch, or less than 0.10 inch. In many embodiments, the width 10154 can be less than 1.3 inches, less than 1.2 inches, less than 1.1 inches, less than 1.0 inch, less than 0.9 inch, less than 0.8 inch, less than 0.7 inch, less than 0.6 inch, less than 0.5 inch, or less than 0.4 inch. In many embodiments, the depth 10156 can be less than 1.0 inch, less than 0.9 inch, less than 0.8 inch, less than 0.7 inch, less than 0.6 inch, less than 0.5 inch, less than 0.4 inch, less than 0.3 inch, less than 0.2 inch, or less than 0.1 inch. In many embodiments, one or more of the weights can have a surface area in contact with the club head body when the weight is coupled to any of the attachment. In many embodiments, the surface area of the weight in contact with the club head can be less than 0.75 inch2, less than 0.7 inch2, less than 0.65 inch2, less than 0.6 inch2, less than 0.55 inch2, less than 0.5 inch2, less than 0.45 inch2, less than 0.4 inch2, less than 0.35 inch2, less than 0.3 inch2, or less than 0.25 inch2.
In many embodiments, the adjustable weighting system includes a first weight W positionable in the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head. In some embodiments, the adjustable weight system can further comprise additional weights, such as a second weight, a third weight, a fourth weight, and a fifth weight positionable in the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head. In these embodiments, each weight of the plurality of weights can be positioned in a different discrete attachment location on the club head. Further, in these embodiments, each weight of the plurality of weights can be removed and replaced or repositioned in different discrete attachment locations on the club head. While the embodiments of the adjustable weight system described herein include up to five weights, other embodiments can include adjustable weighting systems having any number of weights.
In many embodiments, the first weight is heavier than the remaining weights (e.g. the second weight, the third weight, the fourth weight, and/or the fifth weight). The first weight can comprises a mass greater than 10 grams, greater than 12 grams, greater than 14 grams, greater than 16 grams, greater than 18 grams, greater than 20 grams, greater than 22 grams, greater than 24 grams, greater than 26 grams, greater than 28 grams, or greater than 30 grams. For example, first weight can comprises a mass between 6 and 50 grams, between 10 and 50 grams, between 15 and 50 grams, between 20 and 50 grams, between 15 and 40 grams, between 20 and 40 grams, between 25 and 35 grams, between 10 and 25 grams, between 15 and 25 grams, between 10 and 20 grams, or between 15 and 20 grams. The remaining weights (e.g. the second weight, the third weight, the fourth weight, and/or the fifth weight) can comprise a mass less than 20 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 16 grams, less than 14 grams, less than 12 grams, less than 10 grams, less than 8 grams, less than 6 grams, less than 4 grams, or less than 2 grams. For example, the remaining weights can comprise a mass between 0.10 and 15 grams, between 0.25 and 10 grams, between 0.5 and 7 grams, or between 1 and 10 grams.
The first weight can be positioned in any of the discrete attachment locations. In embodiments having an adjustable weighting system comprising two discrete attachment locations, the first weight can be positioned in the first attachment location positioned near the toe 18 or the second attachment location positioned near the heel 22. In these embodiments, shifting the first weight from the first attachment location to the second attachment location shifts the head CG toward the heel 22, and shifting the first weight from the second attachment location to the first attachment location shifts the head CG toward the toe 18. In these embodiments, the remaining attachment location can be devoid of a weight, or the remaining attachment location can comprise an additional weight (e.g. the second weight).
In embodiments having an adjustable weighting system comprising three discrete attachment locations, the first weight W can be positioned in the third attachment location B positioned centrally, thereby generating a neutral head CG position. The first weight can be shifted from the third attachment location B to the first attachment location A, positioned toward the toe 18, thereby shifting the head CG 50 toward the toe 18 by a distance. The first weight W can be shifted from the third attachment location B to the second attachment location C, positioned toward the heel 22, thereby shifting the head CG 50 toward the heel 22 by a distance. In these embodiments, the remaining locations can be devoid of weights, or the remaining locations can comprise additional weights (e.g. the second weight and/or the third weight).
Shifting the first weight W from an attachment location nearest the toe 18 to an attachment location nearest the heel 22 can shift the head CG 50 by a distance of at least 0.10 inch, at least 0.15 inch, at least 0.20 inch, at least 0.25 inch, or at least 0.30 inch, in a direction extending parallel to the x-axis 54. For example, in many embodiments, shifting the first weight W from an attachment location nearest the toe 18 to an attachment location nearest the heel 22 can shift the head CG 50 by a distance between 0.10 and 0.30 inch, between 0.15 and 0.30 inch, between 0.20 and 0.30 inch, between 0.15 and 0.25 inch, or between 0.20 and 0.25 inch.
In these or other embodiments, shifting the head CG 50 toward the toe 18 can generate a fade or correct for a hook. Conversely, shifting the head CG 50 toward the heel 22 can generate a draw or correct for a slice. In the embodiments of the adjustable weighting system described below, shifting head CG 50 in a direction extending parallel to the x-axis 54 between 0.10 and 0.30 inch can result in a change in shot bend of 4.6 to 13.9 yards.
Other embodiments can include one or more discrete attachment locations positioned toward the strike face 38 of the club head 100. In these embodiments, shifting one or more weights to an attachment location(s) near the back end 34 of the club head 100 from an attachment location near the strike face 38 can increase the club head moment of inertia about the head CG MOICG and increase dynamic loft or launch angle of a golf ball. Conversely, shifting one or more weights to an attachment location(s) near the strike face 38 of the club head 100 from an attachment location near the back end 34 can reduce dynamic loft or launch angle of a golf ball.
The embodiments of the club heads having adjustable weighting systems described herein maximize head CG depth 10130 and club head moment of inertia (or minimize the reduction in head CG depth 10130 and club head moment of inertia typically associated with introducing adjustability compared to a non-adjustable club head). In many embodiments, the maximized head CG depth and club head moment of inertia are achieved with first adjustable weight having a relatively low mass, thereby increasing the efficiency of the design to maintain club head performance characteristics (e.g. forgiveness, low back spin, high launch), while enabling user adjustability of ball spin and/or trajectory.
Referring to Relation 3 below, the club heads having adjustable weighting systems comprise a depth to mass ratio of the head CG depth 10130 to the mass of the first weight Wm. In many embodiments, the depth to mass ratio of the club head can be greater than 0.060 inch/gram, greater than 0.070 inch/gram, greater than 0.080 inch/gram, greater than 0.090 inch/gram, greater than 0.100 inch/gram, greater than 0.110 inch/gram, greater than 0.120 inch/gram, or greater than 0.130 inch/gram. In some embodiments, the depth to mass ratio can be between 0.070 and 0.13 inch/gram, between 0.080 and 0.13 inch/gram, between 0.090 and 0.13 inch/gram, between 0.070 and 0.11 inch/gram, between 0.080 and 0.11 inch/gram, or between 0.090 and 0.11 inch/gram. In these embodiments, the mass of the first weight can be less than 25 grams, less than 24 grams, less than 23 grams, less than 22 grams, less than 20 grams, less than 19 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 17 grams, less than 16 grams, or less than 15 grams. In some embodiments, the mass of the first weight can be between 10 and 20 grams, between 12 and 20 grams, between 14 and 20 grams, between 16 and 20 grams, between 10 and 18 grams, between 12 and 18 grams, or between 14 and 18 grams.
Depth to Mass Ratio=Head CG Depth/Wm Relation 3
Referring to Relation 4 below, the club heads having adjustable weighting systems can comprise a first inertia to mass ratio defined as the combined moment of inertia about the head CG MOICG to the mass of the first weight Wm. In many embodiments, the first inertia to mass ratio can be greater than 400 cm2, greater than 410 cm2, greater than 420 cm2, greater than 430 cm2, greater than 440 cm2, greater than 450 cm2, greater than 460 cm2, greater than 470 cm2, greater than 480 cm2, greater than 490 cm2, greater than 500 cm2, greater than 510 cm2, greater than 520 cm2, greater than 530 cm2, greater than 540 cm2, or greater than 550 cm2. In some embodiments, the first inertia to mass ratio can be between 400 and 550 cm2, between 410 and 550 cm2, between 420 and 550 cm2, between 430 and 550 cm2, between 440 and 550 cm2, between 450 and 550 cm2, between 400 and 500 cm2, between 410 and 500 cm2, between 420 and 500 cm2, between 430 and 500 cm2, between 440 and 500 cm2, or between 450 and 500 cm2. In these embodiments, the mass of the first weight can be less than 25 grams, less than 24 grams, less than 23 grams, less than 22 grams, less than 20 grams, less than 19 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 17 grams, less than 16 grams, or less than 15 grams. In some embodiments, the mass of the first weight can be between 10 and 20 grams, between 12 and 20 grams, between 14 and 20 grams, between 16 and 20 grams, between 10 and 18 grams, between 12 and 18 grams, or between 14 and 18 grams.
First Inertia to Mass Ratio=MOICG/Wm Relation 4
The embodiments of the club heads having adjustable weighting systems described herein maximize the total shift in head CG as achievable by adjusting the one or more weights to the plurality of discrete attachment locations. In many embodiments, the maximized total shift in head CG is achieved with first adjustable weight having a relatively low mass, thereby increasing the efficiency of the design to maintain club head performance characteristics (e.g. forgiveness, low back spin, high launch) while enabling user adjustability of ball spin and/or trajectory.
Referring to Relation 5 below, the club heads having adjustable weighting systems comprise a head CG to mass ratio defined as the total shift in head CG or maximum head CG shift to the mass of the first weight. In many embodiments, the head CG to mass ratio can be greater than 0.008 inch/gram, greater than 0.009 inch/gram, greater than 0.010 inch/gram, greater than 0.011 inch/gram, greater than 0.012 inch/gram, greater than 0.013 inch/gram, greater than 0.014 inch/gram, or greater than 0.015 inch/gram. In some embodiments, the head CG to mass ratio can be between 0.008 and 0.015 inch/gram, between 0.009 and 0.015 inch/gram, between 0.010 and 0.015 inch/gram, between 0.008 and 0.013 inch/gram, between 0.009 and 0.013 inch/gram, or between 0.010 and 0.013 inch/gram. In these embodiments, the mass of the first weight can be less than 25 grams, less than 24 grams, less than 23 grams, less than 22 grams, less than 20 grams, less than 19 grams, less than 18 grams, less than 17 grams, less than 16 grams, or less than 15 grams. In some embodiments, the mass of the first weight can be between 10 and 20 grams, between 12 and 20 grams, between 14 and 20 grams, between 16 and 20 grams, between 10 and 18 grams, between 12 and 18 grams, or between 14 and 18 grams.
Head CG to Mass Ratio=Maximum Head CG Shift/Wm Relation 5
The one or more weights of the adjustable weighting system comprise a weight CG 10134. In many embodiments, the weight CG is positioned near a rear perimeter or skirt 10136 of the club head when viewed from a top or bottom view (
In these embodiments, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights is positioned at a distance 10142 from the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 100 when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100. The distance 10142 can be measured as the projected distance from the weight CG to the perimeter 10136 when the club head is viewed from a bottom view, perpendicular to the x′z′ plane 10126, when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100. Further, the distance 10142 can be measured in a direction parallel to the x′z′ plane 10126, when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100. For example, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned within 0.7 inch, within 0.65 inch, within 0.6 inch, within 0.55 inch, within 0.5 inch, within 0.45 inch, within 0.4 inch, within 0.35 inch, within 0.3 inch, within 0.25 inch, or within 0.2 inch of the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 100. For further example, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned between 0.10 and 0.50 inch, between 0.25 and 0.5 inch, between 0.10 and 0.25 inch, between 0.10 and 0.35 inch, or between 0.10 and 0.45 inch from the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 100.
Further, in these embodiments, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights is positioned at a distance 10138 from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 of the club head 100 when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100. For example, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned at a distance 10138 greater than 2.0 inches, greater than 2.25 inches, greater than 2.5 inches, greater than 2.75 inches, greater than 3.0 inches, greater than 3.25 inches, greater than 3.5 inches, or greater than 3.75 inches from the geometric center of the strike face. For further example, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can be positioned at a distance 10138 between 2.0 and 3.5 inches, between 2.5 and 3.5 inches, between 2.0 and 3.0 inches, between 2.5 and 3.0 inches, between 2.5 and 4.0 inches, between 3.0 and 3.75 inches, between 3.0 and 4.0 inches, between 3.2 and 4.0 inches, or between 3.5 and 4.0 inches from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38. Positioning the weight CG 10134 away from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 can increase perimeter weighting and club head moment of inertia, thereby resulting in increased club head forgiveness for off center hits, compared to adjustable weights positioned closer to the strike face. Further, positioning the weight CG 10134 away from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 can result in a head CG position that is lower and farther, thereby increasing club head moment of inertia and reducing back spin, back compared to adjustable weights positioned closer to the strike face.
In many embodiments, the weight CG 10134 protrudes from an external contour or outer surface 10146 of the sole 30, is positioned flush with the external contour 10146 of the sole 30, and/or is positioned minimally inset relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30. Positioning the weight CG 10134 minimally inset, flush with, or external relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 requires less structural support material to receive the one or more weights, thereby maintaining a low profile adjustable weighting system. Accordingly, positioning the weight CG 10134 minimally inset, flush with, or external relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 can increase perimeter weighting and club head moment of inertia, thereby resulting in increased club head forgiveness for off center hits, compared to internal adjustable weights or adjustable weights recessed into the club head. Further, positioning the weight CG 10134 minimally inset, flush with, or external relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 can result in a head CG position that is lower and farther back, thereby increasing club head moment of inertia and reducing back spin, back compared to internal adjustable weights or adjustable weights recessed into the club head.
In these embodiments, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights is positioned at a distance 10148 from the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 when the weight is positioned at one or more of the plurality of discrete attachment locations on the club head 100, wherein the distance 10148 is measured in a direction parallel to the y-axis 58. For example, the weight CG 10134 of one or more of the weights can protrude from the external contour 10146 of the sole by up to 0.10 inch, up to 0.15 inch, up to 0.20 inch, up to 0.25 inch, or up to 0.30 inch. In some embodiments, the weight CG 10134 of the one or more weights protrudes from the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 by 0.10 to 0.25 inch, by 0.15 to 0.25 inch, by 0.15 to 0.25 inch, or by 0.15 to 0.30 inch. For further example, the weight CG 10134 can be inset relative to the external contour 10146 of the sole 30 by a distance 10148 of less than 0.15 inch, less than 0.14 inch, less than 0.13 inch, less than 0.125 inch, less than 0.12 inch, less than 0.11 inch, less than 0.10 inch, less than 0.09 inch, less than 0.08 inch, or less than 0.07 inch. In some embodiments, the weight CG 10134 of the one or more weights is inset relative to the external contour 10148 of the sole 30 by a distance 10148 between 0.05 and 0.15 inch, between 0.05 and 0.125 inch, between 0.05 and 0.15 inch, between 0.10 and 0.15 inch, between 0.10 and 0.125 inch, or between 0.10 and 0.15 inch.
With reference to
Referring to
In the illustrated embodiment, the three protruding bodies 70A, B, C are generally spaced evenly apart from one another, such that a first of the protruding bodies 70A is positioned generally at the toe or toe end 18, a second of the protruding bodies 70C is positioned generally at the heel or heel end 22, and a third of the protruding bodies 70B is positioned between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22. Each of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 82 to the club head 10. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the club head 10. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are positioned differently. For example, in some embodiments, the protruding bodies 70A, B, C can be spaced unevenly from one another. In these or other embodiments, the two or more protruding bodies 70A, B, C are positioned generally at the toe or toe end 18, and a single protruding body 70A, B, C is positioned at the heel or heel end 22. In some embodiments two or more protruding bodies 70A, B, C are positioned generally at the heel or heel end 22, and a single protruding body 70A, B, C is positioned at the toe or toe end 18. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 70A, B, C can be positioned at any location on the club head 14 being spaced any distance apart from one another.
In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are each positioned generally adjacent a trailing edge 72 (
As illustrated in
The protruding bodies 70A, B, C extend outwardly from the outer surface 74, and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are each generally cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 70A, B, C have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes configured to harbor the complementary weight having a cavity configured to fits around the protruding body 70A,B,C. The weights 82 may be coupled to the club head 14, such that a portion of the weight 82 extends beyond the outer contour of the club head body 14. In the illustrated embodiment, the center of gravity of each weight 82 is positioned within 1 inch from the trailing edge 72, or periphery of the club head body 14. In other embodiments, the center of gravity of each weight 82 can be positioned within 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2 or 0.1 inches of the trailing edge 72, or periphery of the club head body 14.
As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, the apertures extending through the weights 82 are generally cylindrical apertures 86 that are sized and shaped to receive the protruding bodies 70. In other embodiments, the apertures 86 can comprise other shaped corresponding with the shapes of the protruding bodies 70. For example. The apertures 86 can have a polygonal, triangular, rectangular, circular, trapezoidal, ovular, elliptical, or any other suitable shaped cross-section extending through the weight 82. The apertures 86 are through apertures 86 that extend entirely through the weights 82. However, in other embodiments the weights 82 have blind apertures extending only partially through the weight 82.
In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 70A, B, C have external threads, and the weights 82 have internal threads within the apertures 86, such that the weights 82 are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C. In other embodiments, the weights 82 are coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C, or with other structures.
In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 82 are generally flat, to increase club head moment of inertia. In some embodiments, the weights 82 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 82 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 82 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 82 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 82 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 82. In some embodiments, each of the weights 82 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 82 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 82 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 70. In some embodiments, the weights may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 82, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 82 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 82 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 82 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 82 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 82 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 82 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 82 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 82, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight 6382 (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight 6382) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 82 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 82 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 70A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 10 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments a heavier weight 82 is positioned on the protruding body 70B located between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 70A, B near the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22. The aforementioned weight 82 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 34 of the club head 10. In some embodiments a heavier weight 82 is positioned on the protruding body 70C near the heel or heel end 22, while lighter weights 82 are positioned on the protruding body 70A near the toe or toe end 18 and on the protruding body 70B that is located between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22. The aforementioned weight 82 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 22 of the club head 10. In some embodiments a heavier weight 82 is positioned on the protruding body 70A near the toe or toe end 18, while lighter weights 82 are positioned on the protruding body 70C near the heel or heel end 22 and on the protruding body 70B that is located between the toe or toe end 18 and the heel or heel end 22. The aforementioned weight 6382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6318 of the club head 6310. In some embodiments one or more of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 70A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 82 or set of weights 82. In some embodiments, multiple different weights 82 may be used interchangeably with the same protruding body 70A, B, C.
In some embodiments the protruding bodies 70A, B, C include exterior threads, and the corresponding weights that couple to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C include interior threads (e.g., in apertures of the weights similar to the weights 82 described above), such that the weights are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C. In other embodiments, the weights 82 are coupled to the protruding bodies 70A, B, C with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 70A, B, C, or with other structures.
The adjustable weighting system 66 of golf club head 10 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 66 of golf club head 10 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 10 having the adjustable weighting system 66 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 166 is similar to the adjustable weighting system 66, except the adjustable weighting system 166 includes a plurality of recessed portions 180A, B, C instead of a plurality of raised portions 78. Each recessed portion 180A, B, C can comprise a recessed surface 181A, B, C. The recessed surfaces 181A, B, C can be configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 166 includes three recessed portions 180A, B, C each having a recessed surface 181A, B, C. The recessed surfaces 181A, B, C each comprise a discrete attachment location. The discrete attachment locations each comprise features which can be in the form of protruding bodies 170A, B, C. Further, the protruding bodies can be configured to receive a weight 182, except the weighting system 166 includes a recess 180. The weight 182 can be similar to the weight 82 described above and can have the same size, shape, and weight. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 166 includes three protruding bodies 170 (A, B, C), positioned in the same configuration as described in the adjustable weighting system 66. Each protruding body 170A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 182 to the club head 110. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the club head 10. The protruding bodies 170 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights 182 may be coupled to the protruding bodies 170 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 170 are each generally cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 170 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes. Further, the protruding bodies 170 may be positioned at any position on the club head body 114 similar to the protruding bodies 70 and club head body 14.
As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 166 of golf club head 110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 166 of golf club head 110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 110 having the adjustable weighting system 166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66 and 166, the adjustable weighting system 266 includes at least one discrete attachment location. The at least one discrete attachment location can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 266 includes one discrete attachment position. The discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 270.
As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment adjustable weighting system 266 includes a single protruding body 270 that extends outwardly from an outer surface 274 of the club head body 214. The protruding body 270 extends from a generally central position between the heel end 222 and toe end 218 of the club head body 210. In other embodiments, the protruding body 270 can extend from any position on the club head 210 similar to the protrusions 70, 170. The protruding body 270 (
With continued reference to
While only a single protruding body 270 and a single weight 282 are illustrated, in other embodiments the adjustable weighting system 266 includes multiple protruding bodies 270 and multiple weights 282 similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166. Additionally, in other embodiments the location of the protruding body or bodies 270 can differ from that illustrated similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166.
Further, in some embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 266 can comprise a plurality of weights 282. The plurality of weights 282 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 282 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 282 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 282 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 282 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 282. In some embodiments, each of the weights 282 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 282 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 282 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 270A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 282 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 282, one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 282 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 282 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 282 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 282 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 282 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 282 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 282 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 282 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 282, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 282 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 282 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 282 can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 282 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 282 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 282 each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 282 can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight 282 (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight 282) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 282, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 282 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The adjustable weighting system 266 of golf club head 210 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 266 of golf club head 210 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 210 having the adjustable weighting system 266 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed surface 381 is tapered from a shallowest part of the recessed portion at the first edge 392 to the deepest part of the recessed portion at the back wall 393. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 380 can have a constant depth, such that the recessed surface 380 extends offset and substantially parallel to the sole 330 of the club head 310. Further, in the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 380 has a depth of 0.2 inches offset from the sole 330 of the club head 10. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 380 can have a depth of 0.05 to 1 inches offset from the sole 330 of the club head 310. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 380 can have a depth of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches offset from the sole 30 of the club head 310. The recessed portion 380 can be positioned at any location on the club head 310.
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 370 and their position the adjustable weighting system 366 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266. The adjustable weighting system 366 includes at least one protruding body 370 (
The protruding body 370 may be of any shape and any configuration such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding body 370 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights, creating a low profile weighting system). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding body 370 is a rib positioned within a recessed portion 380 of the club head 310 along a sole or bottom 330 of the club head 310. The protruding body 370 extends outwardly from the recessed surface 381, and entirely across the recessed portion 380, from the first edge 392 of the recessed portion 380 to the second edge 394 of the recessed portion 380. However, in other embodiments the protruding body 370 extends only partially across the recessed portion 380. For example, in some embodiments the protruding body 370 does not contact the first edge 392 or the second edge 394, and is generally isolated within the recessed portion 380.
With continued reference to
In the illustrated embodiment, the weight 382 includes a first portion 402 and a second portion 404. The first portion 402 and the second portion 404 are separated by a gap and connected only by a post 398. The gap between the first portion 402 and the second portion 404 is configured to receive the protruding body 370. The first portion 402 and the second portion 404 slide into the recessed portion 380 of the club head 310 on either side of the protruding body 370 when the weight 382 is coupled to the protruding body 370. The post 398 is configured to fit within the slot 396 when the first portion 402 and second portion 404 are positioned on either side of the protruding body 370. For example, in some embodiments, the post 398 can be rectangular, circular, triangular, polygonal, trapezoidal or any other suitable shape corresponding with the slot 396. Illustrated in
While only a single weight 382 is illustrated, in other embodiments, the protruding body 370 receives more than one weight 382 (e.g., by use of more than one slot 396). In some embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 366 includes more than one protruding body 370, each of which receives one or more weights 382.
Further, in some embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 366 can comprise a plurality of weights 3823. The plurality of weights 382 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 382 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 382 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 382 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 382 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 382. In some embodiments, each of the weights 382 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 382 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 382 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 370A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 382 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 382, one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 382 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 382 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 382 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 382 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 382 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 382 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 382 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 382 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 382, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 382 can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 382 each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 382 can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 382 each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 382 can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight 382 (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight 382) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 382, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 382 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The adjustable weighting system 366 of golf club head 310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 366 of golf club head 310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 310 having the adjustable weighting system 366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Similar to the adjustable weighting system 366, the adjustable weighting system 466 can comprise a recessed portion 480. The recessed portion 480 comprises a recessed surface 481. The recessed surface 481 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 366 comprises a recessed surface 381 comprising three discrete attachment locations. Each discrete attachment location comprises a feature in the form of a protruding body 470A, B, C. Further, the protruding body 370 can comprise a weight 382.
Referring again to
With continued reference to
The recessed portion 480 comprises a length measured as the distance between the first edge 492 and the second edge 49. In some embodiments, the recessed portion 480 can have a length which extends the majority of the distance from the heel end 422 to the toe end 424. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 480 can have a length which extends a portion of the way between the heel end 422 and the toe end 424. Further, in the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 480 has a depth of 0.2 inches measured as the distance the recessed surface 481 is offset from the sole 430 of the club head 410. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 480 can have a depth of 0.05 to 1 inches offset from the sole 430 of the club head 410. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 480 can have a depth of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches offset from the sole 430 of the club head 410.
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 470, their position, and their shape the adjustable weighting system 466 is similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166. The adjustable weighting system 466 includes at least one protruding body 470 that receives a weight. The weights (not shown) can be similar in size, shape and mass to the weight 82 described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 466 includes three protruding bodies 470A, B, C. Each protruding body 470A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 482 to the club head 410. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 466 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 protruding bodies.
The protruding bodies 470 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 470A,B,C (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 470A, B, C are each generally cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 470A, B, C have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes. Further, the protruding bodies 470A, B, C are positioned within the recessed portion 480 of the club head 410.
The protruding bodies 470A, B, C extend outwardly from the outer surface 474. One of the protruding bodies 470A extends from the recessed surface 481 generally at the toe or toe end 418, one of the protruding bodies 470C extends from the recessed surface 481 generally at the heel or heel end 422, and one of the protruding bodies 470B extends from the recessed surface 481 generally between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422. In other embodiments, any number of protruding bodies 470 can extends outwardly from any location along the outer surface 474. For example, in some embodiments, there can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 protruding bodies 474 extending outwardly from the outer surface 474. Further, in the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced equidistance from one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced a varying distance from one another. For example, the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 492 and the second edge 494 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 3 inches between one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 474 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 492 and the second edge 494 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.5, 1.0 to 2.0, 1.5 to 2.5, or 2.0 to 3.0 inches between one another. In some embodiments the protruding bodies 470 include exterior threads, and the corresponding weights that couple to the protruding bodies 470 include interior threads (e.g., in apertures of the weights similar to the weights 82 described above), such that the weights are threadably coupled to the protruding bodies 470. In other embodiments, the weights are coupled to the protruding bodies 470 with friction fits, with snap-fit mechanisms, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 470, or with other structures.
In the illustrated embodiment, in some embodiments, each of the weights (not shown) can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may have a greater volume than the remaining weights. In some embodiments, each of the weights may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the weights can be a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 470A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights, one or more of the weights may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 470A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 410 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body 470B, located between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 470A, C near the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6334 of the club head 410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body 470C near the heel or heel end 422, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body 470A near the toe or toe end 418 and on the third protruding body 470B that is located between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 422 of the club head 410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body 470A near the toe or toe end 418, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding body second 470C near the heel or heel end 422 and on the third protruding body 470B that is located between the toe or toe end 418 and the heel or heel end 422. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 418 of the club head 410. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 470A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 470A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 470A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 470A, B, C has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
The adjustable weighting system 466 of golf club head 410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 466 of golf club head 410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 410 having the adjustable weighting system 466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Similar to the adjustable weighting system 466, the adjustable weighting system 566 can comprise a recessed portion 580. The recessed portion 580 comprises a recessed surface 581. The recessed surface 581 can include a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 566 comprises a recessed surface 581 including three discrete attachment locations. The discrete attachment locations each comprise a feature in the form of a protruding body 570A, B, C. Further, the protruding bodies 570A, B, C can comprise a weight 582.
As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, one of the protruding bodies 570A is positioned generally at the toe or toe end 518, one of the protruding bodies 570C is positioned generally at the heel or heel end 522, and the other protruding body 570B is positioned between the toe or toe end 518 and the heel or heel end 522. Each protruding body 570A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 582 to the club head 510. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. Further, Similar to the protruding bodies 470 the protruding bodies 570 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 570 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 570 are each generally cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 570 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes.
With continued reference to
The adjustable weighting system 566 of golf club head 510 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 566 of golf club head 510 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 510 having the adjustable weighting system 566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed surfaces 681A, B, C are positioned adjacent each other, such that a first recessed surface 681A is positioned proximate the second edge 694 near the toe end 618, a second recessed surface 681C is positioned proximate the first edge 694 near the heel end 622, and a third recessed surface 681B is positioned between the first edge 692 near the heel end 622 and the second edge 694 near the toe end 618. As illustrated in
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 670 and their positioning the adjustable weight system 666 is similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566. The adjustable weighting system 666 includes at least one protruding body 670 that receives a weight. The weight (not shown) can be similar to the weight 82, described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 666 includes three protruding bodies 670A,B,C each defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 682 to the club head 610. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion 680. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 666 can include more or less that three protruding bodies 670.
The protruding bodies 670A, B, C can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570 described above and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 670A, B, C (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, in the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 670 are each generally cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 670 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 670A, B, C extend outwardly from the outer surface 674. In the illustrated embodiment, protruding bodies 670A, B, C extend outward from the wall 694 in a direction generally towards the trailing edge 672. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 670 A, B, C can extend outward from the recessed surface 681. Further, in the illustrated embodiment, one of the protruding bodies 670A is positioned generally at the recessed surface 681A or toe end 618 and extends from the wall 683, one of the protruding bodies 670C is positioned generally at the recessed surface 681C or heel end 622 and extends from the wall 683, and the other protruding body 670B is positioned between the recessed surface 681A or toe end 618 and the recessed surface 681C or heel end 622 and extends from the wall 683. In other embodiments, there can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 protruding bodies 670 extending outwardly from the outer surface 674. Further, in some embodiments, the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced equidistance from one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced a varying distance from one another. For example, the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 692 and the second edge 694 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 3 inches between one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 674 can be spaced at any point between the first edge 692 and the second edge 694 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.5, 1.0 to 2.0, 1.5 to 2.5, or 2.0 to 3.0 inches between one another.
In the illustrated embodiment, in some embodiments, each of the weights (not shown) can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight may have a greater volume than the remaining weights. In some embodiments, each of the weights may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C can comprise a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights, one or more of the weights may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight each can have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 670A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 610 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body 670B, located between the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 670A, C near the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6334 of the club head 610. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body 670C near the heel or heel end 622, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body 670A near the toe or toe end 618 and on the third protruding body 670B that is located between the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 622 of the club head 610. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body 670A near the toe or toe end 618, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding body second 670C near the heel or heel end 622 and on the third protruding body 670B that is located between the toe or toe end 618 and the heel or heel end 622. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 618 of the club head 610. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 670A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 670A, B, C has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
The adjustable weighting system 666 of golf club head 610 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 666 of golf club head 610 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 610 having the adjustable weighting system 666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above
Referring to
Referring again to
Referring again to
For purposes of this example, the features 770 will be referred to as protruding bodies 770, however the feature 770 can refer to any of the features 770 mentioned above. With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 770 and their positioning the adjustable weight system 766 is similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666. The adjustable weighting system 766 includes at least one protruding body 770 that receives a weight. The weight (not shown) can be similar to the weight 82, described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 766 includes four protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D although other embodiments can include more or less that four protruding bodies 770. Each protruding body 770A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 782 to the club head 710. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
The protruding bodies 770 are similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670 described above, and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 770 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, the protruding bodies 770 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 770A, B, C, D extend outwardly from the outer surface 774. Three of the protruding bodies 770A, B, C are positioned on the recessed surface 781A, and the fourth protruding body 770D is positioned on the other recessed surface 781B. More specifically, a first protruding body 770 A is positioned near the toe end 818, a second protruding body is positioned near the heel end 822, a third protruding body 770C is positioned between the toe and heel end 818, 822, a fourth protruding body 770D is positioned centered on the recessed surface 781B. In other embodiments the protruding body or bodies 770A, B, C, D are positioned at different locations. As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 766 of golf club head 710 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 766 of golf club head 710 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 710 having the adjustable weighting system 766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring to
Similar to the adjustable weighting system 766, in the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 866 comprises two recessed portions 880A, B each having a recessed surface 881A, B. Further, each recessed portion 880A, B comprises a wall 883A, B defining a perimeter of the recessed portion 880A, B and separating the recessed surfaces 881A, B from the surface 874 of the club head 810. The recessed surface 881A, B are positioned adjacent each other, however alternative to the recessed surfaces 781A, B of the recessed portions 780A,B, the recessed surfaces 881A, B face the same direction substantially parallel with the top surface 855 of the extended portion 850. In the illustrated embodiment, a first one of the recessed portions 880A is positioned adjacent the trailing edge 872 and has a width which extends from the heel end 822 to the toe end 818 of the club head 820. Further, a second one of the recessed portions 880B is offset from the trailing edge by the width of the first recessed portion 880A and is positioned between the heel end 822 and toe end 818 of the club head 810. Further, the recessed portions 880A, B have a depth measured as the distance the recessed surface 881A, B is offset from the outer surface 874. In the illustrated embodiment, the depth of the recessed surface 881A is greater than the depth of the recessed surface 881B. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed surface 881A can be less than the depth of the recessed surface 881B. In many embodiments, the recessed surfaces 881A, B can have depths of 0.05 to 1 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed surfaces 881A, B can have depths of 0.05 to 0.1, 0.1 to 0.2, 0.2 to 0.3, 0.3 to 0.4, 0.4 to 0.5, 0.5 to 0.6, 0.6 to 0.7, 0.7 to 0.8, 0.8 to 0.9, or 0.9 to 1 inches. In other embodiments, the adjustable weight system 866 can have any number of recessed portions 880. For example, the adjustable weight system 866 can have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 recessed portions 880.
For purposes of this example, the features 870 will be referred to as protruding bodies 870, however the feature 870 can refer to any of the features 870 mentioned above. With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 870 and their position the adjustable weight system 866 is similar to the adjustable weighting system 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766. The adjustable weighting system 866 includes at least one protruding body 880 (illustrated schematically by the circles marked on the figures) that receives a weight. The weight (not shown) can be similar to the weights 82, described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 866 includes six protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F. In other embodiments, the adjustable weight system 866 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 870 and the recessed portions 880A, B can be positioned on any outer surface 874 of the club head 810.
The protruding bodies 870 can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670, 770 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 870 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, the protruding bodies 870 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F extend outwardly from the recessed surfaces 881A, B. In the illustrated embodiment, there are five protruding bodies 870A, B, C, D, E positioned on one of the recessed surface 881A (i.e., the lower recessed surface 881 positioned adjacent the trailing edge 872), and a sixth protruding body 870F is positioned on the second recessed surface 881B (i.e., the raised recessed surface 881, offset from the trailing edge 872). More specifically, a first protruding body 870A is positioned generally at the toe end 818, a second protruding body 870E is positioned generally at the heel end 822, a third protruding body 870C is positioned between the toe end 818 and the heel end 822, a fourth protruding body 870B is positioned between the first protruding body 870A and the third protruding body 870C, a fifth protruding body is positioned between the third protruding body 870C and the second protruding body 870E, and finally a sixth protruding body 870F is positioned centered on the recessed surface 881B. Each protruding body 870A, B, C, D, E, F defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 882 to the club head 810. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other embodiments the protruding body or bodies 870A, B, C, D, E, F are positioned at different locations. As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 866 of golf club head 810 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 866 of golf club head 810 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 810 having the adjustable weighting system 866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 970 A,B,C,D,E,F and their position the adjustable weighting system 966 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 966 includes at least one protruding body 970 that receives a weight. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 966 includes six protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F. The protruding bodies 970 are positioned within a recessed portion 980 of the club head 910 along a sole or bottom 930 of the club head 910. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 966 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 970.
The protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F are similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 970 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). The weights (not shown) can be similar to the weight 82, described above. For example, the protruding bodies 970 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 970 extend outwardly from the outer surface 974 of the club head 910. In the illustrated embodiment, a first two of the protruding bodies 970A, B are positioned on the first portion 985, a second two of the protruding bodies 970A, B, D, E, are positioned on the second portion 987, one of the protruding bodies 970D is positioned on the third portion 989, and the remaining protruding body 970C is positioned on the intersecting region 998. Each of the protruding bodies A, B, C, D, E, F defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 982 to the club head 910. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. More specifically, a first protruding body 970A is positioned generally at the toe end 918, a second protruding body 970E is positioned generally at the heel end 922, a third protruding body 970C is positioned between the toe end 918 and the heel end 922, a fourth protruding body 970B is positioned on the first portion 985 between the first protruding body 970A and the third protruding body 970C, a fifth protruding body 970E is positioned on the second portion 987 between the third protruding body 970C and the second protruding body 970E, and finally a sixth protruding body 970F is positioned at point nearest the face on the third portion 989. In other embodiments the protruding body or bodies 970 are positioned at different locations. For example, in some embodiments, the protruding body or bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F can be equally distributed across the first, second and third portion 985, 987, 989. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies can be more heavily distributed in the third region 989. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F can be separated by an equal distance between one another. In other embodiments, the distance between the protruding bodies 970A, B, C, D, E, F can vary from protruding body 970 to protruding body 970. Further, as illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 910 having the adjustable weighting system 966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
The recessed portion 1080 is similar to the recessed portion 680, except the recessed portion 680 comprises only a single recessed surface 681. In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 1080 includes a recessed surface 1081. The recessed surface 1081 is disposed along a sole or bottom 1030 of the club head 1010, forming part of an overall outer surface 1074 of the club head 1010. The recessed surface 1081 is disposed adjacent a trailing edge 1072 of the club head 1010. The recessed surface 1081 is separated from a remainder of the outer surface 1074 or sole 1030 by a wall 1083, a first edge 1092 proximate the heel end 1022 of the club head 1010, and a second edge 1094 proximate a toe end 1028 of the club head 1010. As illustrated in
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1070 and their position, the adjustable weighting system 1066 can be similar to 66, 166, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1066 includes at least one protruding body 1070 that receives a weight. The weight can be similar to the weight 82 described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1066 includes four protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D.
The protruding body 1070A,B,C,D can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870, 970 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 10701070A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, the protruding bodies 1070 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D extend outwardly from the outer surface 1074. In the illustrated embodiment, three of the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C extend from the wall 1083 and a fourth protruding body 1070D extends from the recesses surface 1081. More specifically, a first protruding body 1070A is positioned generally at the toe or toe end 1018 and extends from the first wall 1083, a second protruding body 1070C is positioned generally at the heel or heel end 1022 and extends from the first wall 1083, a third protruding body 1070B is positioned between the toe or toe end 1018 and the heel or heel end 1022 and extends from the first wall 1083, and a finally a fourth protruding body 1070D is positioned generally between the toe end 1028 and the heel end 1022 and extends from the recessed surface 1081. Each of the first, second and third protruding bodies 1070 extends from the first wall 1083 towards the trailing edge 1072. Further, each protruding body 1070A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1010. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other embodiments, there can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1070 extending outwardly from the outer surface 1074 within the recessed portion 1080. Further, in some embodiments, the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can be spaced equidistance from one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can be spaced a varying distance from one another. For example, the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can be located at any point between the first edge 1092 and the second edge 1094 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 3 inches between one another. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can be located at any point between the first edge 1092 and the second edge 1094 spaced by a distance of 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 1.0, 0.7 to 1.5, 1.0 to 2.0, 1.5 to 2.5, or 2.0 to 3.0 inches between one another. Further, in some embodiments, one of the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can be larger than the other protruding bodies. The larger protruding body 1070A, B, C, D may, for example, be used to couple a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D (e.g. to a heavier swing weight). In some embodiments the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D are all of equal size, but one of the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D is coupled to a heavier weight than the other protruding bodies 1070A,B,C,D. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D are all of equal size and each is coupled to a weight having a different mass than the other protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D are all of equal size and are all couple to weights having the same mass. The weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C, D can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1070A, B, C in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1022 to the toe end 1018). However, because the protrusions 1070A, B, C are positioned further from the trailing edge 1072 of the club head 1010 they can have a greater effect on the spin imparted on the ball. Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1070D can shift the club head 1010 CG further back on the club head 1010 also adjusting the spin imparted on the ball.
The adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 966 of golf club head 910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 910 having the adjustable weighting system 966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1166 includes a single protruding body 1170. The protruding body 1170 is generally cylindrical in shape and is positioned within the recessed portion 1180D of the club head 1110. Although, in other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 1166 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1170.
The protruding body 1170 can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870, 970, 1070 and may be of any shape and any configuration such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding body 1170 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding body 1170 is cylindrical in shape. In some embodiments the protruding body 1170 has a square cross-section, a rectangular cross-section, a triangular cross-section, or any other shape. Further, the protruding bodies 1170 can be positioned at any location on the club head 1110.
Further, the protruding body 1170 extends outwardly from the outer surface 1174 of the recessed portion 1180A. The protruding body 1170 extends generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1181A, and from a central area of the recessed surface 1181A. Although in
The adjustable weighting system 1166 of golf club head 1110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1166 of golf club head 1110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1110 having the adjustable weighting system 1166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1270 and their position the adjustable weight system 1280 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1266 includes at least one protruding body 1270 that receives a weight. The weight can be similar to the weights 82 described above. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1266 includes two protruding bodies 1270A, B. The protruding bodies 1270 are positioned within a recessed portion 1280 of the club head 1210. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 1266 can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1270 and can be positioned anywhere on the club head 1210.
The protruding bodies 1270A, B can be similar to the protruding bodies 70, 170, 270, 470, 570, 670, 770, 870, 970, 1070, 1170 and may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1270A, B (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 1270A, B are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1270A, B may have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 1270A, B extend outwardly from the outer surface 1274. As illustrated in
The weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1270A, B can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1270A, B in a font-toe to back-center manner can shift the CG between the center and the toe, while also changing it from the front to the back.
The adjustable weighting system 1266 of golf club head 1210 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1266 of golf club head 1210 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1210 having the adjustable weighting system 1266 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1370 and their position the adjustable weighting system 1366 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1366 includes four protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 (three of which 1370B, C, 1315 are visible in
The protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). For example, in other embodiments the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 may be cylindrical in shape, have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes. Further, the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 may be positioned at any location on the club head 1310.
The protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 extend outwardly from the outer surface 1374. The protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, 1315 extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1381. As illustrated in
With continued reference to
In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 1382 are coupled to the protruding bodies 1370 A, B, C with friction fits (e.g., by pressing the weights 1382 over the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, or using a tool to attach or remove the weights 1382). In other embodiments the weights 1382A, B, C are coupled to the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C with snap fit mechanisms, with threaded arrangements, with set screws positioned within threaded inner surfaces of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C, or with other structures. In many embodiments, each protruding body 1370A, B, C can comprise a weight 1382.
The weights may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 1310 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body 1370B, located between the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 1370A, C near the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 1334 of the club head 1310. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body 1370C near the heel or heel end 1322, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body 1370A near the toe or toe end 1318 and on the third protruding body 1370B that is located between the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 1322 of the club head 1310. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body 1370A near the toe or toe end 1318, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding body second 1370C near the heel or heel end 1322 and on the third protruding body 1370B that is located between the toe or toe end 1318 and the heel or heel end 1322. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 1318 of the club head 1310. Finally, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 1382 can be positioned on the fourth protruding body 1370D in the third portion of the recess further from the trailing edge 1372, while lighter weights can be positioned on the first, second and third protrusions 1370A, B, C positioned near the toe end 1318, the heel end 1322 and between the toe end 1318 and the heel end 1322. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the CG being shifted towards the front of the club head 1310 effecting the spin imparted on the ball. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 1370A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 1370A, B, C has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
The adjustable weighting system 1366 of golf club head 1310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1366 of golf club head 1310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1310 having the adjustable weighting system 1366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
With continued reference to
Referring to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1470A, B, C their position, their shape, and their size the adjustable weighting system 1466 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, and 1366. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1466 includes three protruding bodies 1470A, B, C.
The protruding bodies 1470A, B, C may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
Further, the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C are positioned within a recessed portion 1480 of the club head 1410. The protruding bodies 1470A, B, C extend generally perpendicularly in an outward direction from the recessed surface 1481. In the illustrated embodiment, a first one of the protruding bodies 1470A extends from the first portion 1485 near the toe end 1418, a second one of the protruding bodies 1470C extends from the second portion 1487 near the heel end 1422, and a third one of the protruding bodies 1470B extends from the third portion 1489 between the toe and heel end 1418, 1422 of the club head 1410. Each of the protruding bodies 1470 A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1410. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
With continued reference to
The weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1470A, B, C can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1470A, C, in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1422 to the toe end 1218). Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1470B can shift the club head 1410 CG towards the front of the club head 1410 affecting the spin imparted on the ball.
The adjustable weighting system 1466 of golf club head 1410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1466 of golf club head 1410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1410 having the adjustable weighting system 1466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D their position, their shape, and their size the adjustable weighting system 1566 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, and 1466. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1566 includes four protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D each defining an attachment point for a weight (not shown). The weight can be similar to the weight 82 described above.
The protruding bodies 1570 A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1580 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1581. In the illustrated embodiment, a first one of the protruding bodies 1570A extends from the first portion 1585, a second one of the protruding bodies 1570C extends from the second portion 1587, a third one of the protruding bodies 1570B extends from the third portion 1589, and a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1570D extends from the fourth portion 1588. Each of the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1510. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D can be positioned in different locations in the recessed portion 1580 or the club head 1510. Finally, in other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 1566 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1570.
The weights (not shown) configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1570A, B, C, D can have the same mass, size, and shape as the weights 82 described above. Further, shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1570A, C in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1522 to the toe end 1518). Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1570B, D can shift the club head 1566 CG towards the front or the back of the club head 1566 affecting the spin imparted on the ball.
The adjustable weighting system 1566 of golf club head 1566 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1566 of golf club head 1566 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1566 having the adjustable weighting system 1566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
With continued reference to
Referring to
Referring again to
As illustrated in
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D their position, their shape, and their size the adjustable weighting system 1666 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, 1466, and 1566. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1666 includes four protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D within the recessed portion 1680, each defining an attachment point for a weight 1682.
The protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1680 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1681. In the illustrated embodiment, a first one of the protruding bodies 1670A extends from the first portion 1685, a second one of the protruding bodies 1670C extends from the second portion 1687, a third one of the protruding bodies 1670B extends from the third portion 1689, and a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1670D extends from the fourth portion 1688. Each of the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight 1682 to the club head 1610. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. By moving a weight 1682 forward and back between the third and fourth protruding bodies 1670 B, D the center of gravity can be shifted towards the strike plate or towards the rear end. By moving the weights 1682 between the first a second protruding bodies 1670A, C the center of gravity can be shifted in a toe end 1618 to heel end 1622 direction. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D can be positioned in different locations in the recessed portion 1680 or the club head 1610. Finally, in other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 1666 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1670.
As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 1682 are generally flat, to increase club head moment of inertia, although other embodiments include different shapes than that illustrated. In some embodiments, the weights 1682 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 1682 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 1682 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 1682 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 1682 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 1682. In some embodiments, each of the weights 1682 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 1682 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 1682 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D. In some embodiments, the weights may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 1682, one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 1682 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 1682 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 1682 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 1682 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 1682 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 1682 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 1682 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 1682 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 1682 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 1682, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 1682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1682 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 1682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1682 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 1682 configured to couple with the protruding bodies 1670A, B, C, D can be strategically positioned to adjust the club head 1610 CG. Shifting the weights between the protruding bodies 1670A, C in a toe to heel manner can have the same effects as discussed in previous embodiments (Shifting the CG from the heel end 1622 to the toe end 1618). Further, shifting a heavier weight to the protruding body 1670B, D can shift the club head 1666 CG towards the front or the back of the club head 1666 affecting the spin imparted on the ball.
The adjustable weighting system 1666 of golf club head 1666 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1666 of golf club head 1666 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1666 having the adjustable weighting system 1666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
With continued reference to
Referring to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F their position, their shape, and their size the adjustable weighting system 1766 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, 1466, 1566, and 1666. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1766 includes six protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F each defining an attachment point for a weight (not shown). The weight can be similar to the weight 82 or the weight 1682 described above.
The protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1780 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1781. In the illustrated embodiment, a first one of the protruding bodies 1770A extends from the fourth portion 1786 nearest the toe end 1718, a second one of the protruding bodies 1770E extends from the sixth portion 1788 nearest the heel end 1722, a third one of the protruding bodies 1770F extends from the third portion 1789, a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1770B extends from the first portion 1785, a fifth one of the protruding bodies 1770D extends from the second portion 1787, and a sixth one of the protruding bodies 1770C extends from the intersection region 1798 of the third portion 1793, the fourth portion 1795, and the fifth portion 1797. Each of the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight (not shown) to the club head 10. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The weights can be similar to the weights 81, 1682 described above. By moving a weight between the third and sixth protruding bodies 1670 C, F the center of gravity can be shifted towards the strike plate or towards the rear end. Further, by moving the weights between the first, second, fourth, fifth, and sixth protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E the center of gravity can be shifted in a toe 1718 to heel 1722 direction. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1770A, B, C, D, E, F can be positioned in different locations within the recessed portion 1780 or the club head 1710. Finally, in other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 1766 can include 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 protruding bodies 1770.
The adjustable weighting system 1766 of golf club head 1766 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1766 of golf club head 1766 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1766 having the adjustable weighting system 1766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D their position, their shape and their size the adjustable weighting system 1866 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, 1466, 1566, 1666, and 1766. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1866 includes four protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D each defining an attachment point for a weight (not shown). The weight can be similar to the weights 82, 1682 described above.
The protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1870 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 1870A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location in the recessed portion 1880 and extend generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1881. In the illustrated embodiment, a first one of the protruding bodies 1870A extends from the first portion 18885, a second one of the protruding bodies 1870C extends from the second portion 1887, a third one of the protruding bodies 1870B extends from the third portion 1893 near the intersection region 1898, and a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1870D extends from the third portion 1889 near the center of the sole 1830. Each of the protruding bodies 1870A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight (not shown) to the club head 1810. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The weights can be similar to the weights 81, 1682 described above. By moving a weight between the third and fourth protruding bodies 1870B, D, the club head center of gravity can be shifted towards the strike plate (not shown) or towards the rear end. By moving a weight between the first and second protruding bodies 1870A, C, the club head center of gravity can be shifted towards the toe end 1818 or the heel end 1822.
The adjustable weighting system 1866 of golf club head 1866 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1866 of golf club head 1866 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1866 having the adjustable weighting system 1866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
With respect to the number of neighboring protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D their position, their shape and their size the adjustable weighting system 1966 can be similar to the adjustable weighting systems 66, 166, 266, 366, 466, 566, 666, 766, 866, 966, 1066, 1166, 1266, 1366, 1466, 1566, 1666, 1766, and 1866. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 1966 includes four protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D each defining an attachment point for a weight 1982.
The protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D are cylindrical in shape. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 1970 have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
The protruding bodies 1980A, B, C, D can be positioned at any location within the recessed portion 1980 extending generally perpendicularly from the recessed surface 1981. In the illustrated embodiment, a first one of the protruding bodies 1970A extends from the first portion 1985, a second one of the protruding bodies 1970C extends from the second portion 1987, a third one of the protruding bodies 1970B extends from the third portion 1989 near the intersection region 1998, and a fourth one of the protruding bodies 1970D extends from the third portion 1989 near the center of the sole 1930. Each of the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 1910. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
As illustrated in
Referring again to
In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 1982 are generally flat, to increase club head moment of inertia, although other embodiments include different shapes than that illustrated. In some embodiments, the weights 1982 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 1982 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 1982 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 1982 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 1982 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 1982. In some embodiments, each of the weights 1982 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 1982 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 1982 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D. In some embodiments, the weights may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 1982, one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 1982 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 1982 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 1982 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 1982 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 1982 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 1982 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 1982 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 1682 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 1982 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 1982, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 1982 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1982 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1982 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 1982 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 1982 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 1982 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
By moving a weight between the third and fourth protruding bodies 1970B, D, the club head center of gravity can be shifted towards the strike plate (not shown) or towards the rear end. By moving a weight between the first and second protruding bodies 1970A, C, the club head center of gravity can be shifted towards the toe end 1818 or the heel end 1822.
The adjustable weighting system 1966 of golf club head 1966 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 1966 of golf club head 1966 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 1966 having the adjustable weighting system 1966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 2066 comprises a recessed portion 2080 having a recessed surface 2081 configured to include a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 2066 comprises a recessed surface 2081 including three discrete attachment locations. The three discrete attachment locations each having a feature in the form of a protruding body 2070A, B, C. The recessed portion 2080, recessed surface 2081, and protruding bodies 2070A, B, C of the club head 2010 are the same as the recessed portion 1980, recessed surface 1981, and protruding bodies 1970A, B, C, D of the adjustable weight system 1966. However, the adjustable weighting system 2066 comprises only three protruding bodies 2070A, B, C. In
The adjustable weighting system 2066 of golf club head 2010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 2066 of golf club head 2066 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 2066 having the adjustable weighting system 2066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the recessed portion 2180 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2166 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 2180 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2180 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 2180 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the recessed portion 2180 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2183 and the end of the recessed portion at or near the trailing edge 2172. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 2180 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2180 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated and discussed above, the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are disposed within the recessed portion 2180 extending partially from the wall 2183 and partially from the recessed surface 2181 such that one or more weights may be releasably coupled to the club head 2110 along the recessed portion 2180. The protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are disposed in pairs along the recessed portion 2180. The pairs of protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F define the discrete attachment locations for securing a weight to the recessed portion 2180. The pairs of protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F can be separated from adjacent pairs of protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F by a distance of greater than 0.2 inches, greater than 0.3 inches, greater than 0.4 inches, greater than 0.5 inches, greater than 0.8 inches, greater than 1.0 inches, greater than 1.25 inches, greater than 1.5 inches, greater than 2.0 inches, greater than 2.5 inches, greater than 3.0 inches, greater than 3.5 inches, or greater than 4.0 inches. In the illustrated embodiment, a first pair 2171 of the protruding bodies 2170A, B is positioned near the toe end 2118 of the recessed portion 2180, a second pair 2175 of the protruding bodies 2170E, F is positioned near the heel end 2122 of the recessed portion 2180, and a third pair 2173 of the protruding bodies 2170C, B between toe and heel ends 2118, 2122 of the recessed portion 2180. The protruding bodies 2170A, C, E of the first, second and third pair 2171, 2173, 2175 of protruding bodies can comprise any distance between the corresponding protruding bodies 2170B, D, F of the first, second and third pair 2171, 2173, 2175. For example, in some embodiments, the protruding bodies 2170 A, B, C, D, E, F making up and of the first, second or third pair of protruding bodies 2171, 2173, 2175 can be separated by a distance of less than 1.0 inches, less than 0.75 inches, less than 0.5 inches, less than 0.4 inches, less than 0.3 inches, less than 0.2 inches, or less than 0.1 inches.
Further, the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F may be of any shapes and any configurations such that one or more weights may be coupled to the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F or to the pairs of protruding bodies 2171, 2173, 2175 (as opposed to being coupled to ports where the ports are holes or cavities within the body of the club that include for example internal threads to couple to external threads on the weights). In the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are ribs. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F are shaped as ribs which extend from the wall 2183 along the recessed surface 2181 towards the trailing edge 2172. Further, the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F comprise a maximum height near the wall 2183 and taper towards the recessed sole 2130 as they extend towards the trailing edge. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 2170A, B, C, D, E, F have square cross-sections, rectangular cross-sections, triangular cross-sections, or have any other shapes.
Turning now to
Turning now to
Turning now to
With reference to
As discussed above, each of the protruding bodies 2170, 2270, 2370 or pair of protruding bodies 2171, 2173, 2175, 2271, 2275 can be configured to receive and/or engage and secure a weight (not shown). In some embodiments, the weight can include a notch, a slot or an aperture corresponding with the shapes and or features discussed above with respect to the protruding bodies 2170, 2270, 2370. In other embodiments, the weight can be devoid of an aperture or slots, or notches. In other embodiments, the weights can be configured to be couple to the protruding bodies 2170, 2270, 2370 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
The weights of each of the aforementioned adjustable weighting systems 2166, 2266, 2366 may be strategically positioned on the pairs of protruding bodies 2171, 2172, 2175 to achieve a desired club head 2110 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the third protruding body pair 2175, located between the toe or toe end 2118 and the heel or heel end 12122, while lighter weights are positioned on the first and second protruding bodies 2171, 2173 near the toe or toe end 2118 and the heel or heel end 2122. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2134 of the club head 2110. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the second protruding body pair 2173 near the heel or heel end 2122, while lighter weights are positioned on the first protruding body pair 2171 near the toe or toe end 2118 and on the third protruding body 2175 that is located between the toe or toe end 2118 and the heel or heel end 2122. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2122 of the club head 2110. In some embodiments, a heavier weight is positioned on the first protruding body pair 2171 near the toe or toe end 2118, while lighter weights are positioned on the second protruding body pair 2173 near the heel or heel end 2122 and on the third protruding body pair 2175 that is located between the toe or toe end 2118 and the heel or heel end 2122. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2118 of the club head 2110. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies pairs 2171, 2173, 2175 are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies pairs 2171, 2173, 2175. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies pairs 2171, 2173, 2175 can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body pairs 2171, 2173, 2175 has its own corresponding weight or set of weights.
The adjustable weighting system 2166, 2266, 2366 of golf club head 2110, 2210, 2310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 2166, 2266, 2366 of golf club head 2110, 2210, 2310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 2110, 2210, 2310 having the adjustable weighting system 2166, 2266, 2366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the channel 2413 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2466 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 2413 has a maximum depth of 0.24 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 2413 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.24, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 2413 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.24, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 2413 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 2473 and the second surface 2474. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 2413 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 2413 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.24, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated, the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C are disposed within the channel 2413 along the third surface 2413 such that one or more weights 2482 may be releasable coupled to the club head 2410 along the channel 2413. More specifically, a first protruding body 2470A is positioned at or near the toe end 2418 of the channel 2413, a second protruding body 2470C is positioned at or near the heel end 2422 of the channel 2413, and a third protruding body 2470B is positioned between the toe and heel end 2418, 2422 of the channel 2413. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C can be positioned on the first surface 2473 of the channel 2413. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C can be positioned on the first surface 2473 and the third surface 2413 of the channel 2413.
With continued reference to
In embodiments wherein the adjustable weight system 2466 comprises more than one weight 2482, each of the weights 2482 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 2482 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 2482 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 2482 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2482 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2482 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 2482 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2482 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2482. In some embodiments, each of the weights 2482 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 2482 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 2482 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 2482 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 2482, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 2482 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2482 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 2482 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 2482 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 2482 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 2482 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 2482 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2482 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 2482, may vary between 5-24 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2482 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2482 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 2482 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 2410 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 2482 is positioned on the third protruding body 2470B, located between the toe or toe end 2418 and the heel or heel end 2422, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2470A, B near the toe or toe end 2418 and the heel or heel end 2422. The aforementioned weight 2482 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2434 of the club head 2410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2482 is positioned on the second protruding body 2470B near the heel or heel end 2422, while lighter weights 2482 are positioned on the first protruding body 6270A near the toe or toe end 2418 and on the second protruding body 2470B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 2482 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2422 of the club head 2410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2482 is positioned on the first protruding body 2470A near the toe or toe end 2418, while lighter weights 2482 are positioned on the second protruding bodies 6270D near the heel or heel end 2422 and on the third protruding body 2470C that is located between the toe or toe end 2418 and the heel or heel end 2422. The aforementioned weight 2482 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2418 of the club head 2410. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2470A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 2470A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 2482 or set of weights 2482.
The adjustable weighting system 2466 of golf club head 2466 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 2466 of golf club head 2466 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 2466 having the adjustable weighting system 2466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the channel 2513 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2566 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 2580 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the recessed portion 2580 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2583 and the trailing edge 2572 or back end 2534. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2580 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated, the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C are disposed within the recessed portion 2580 along the recessed surface 2581 such that one or more weights 2582 may be releasable coupled to the club head 2510 along the recessed portion 2580. More specifically, a first protruding body 2570A is positioned at or near the toe end 2518 of the recessed portion 2580, a second protruding body 2570C is positioned at or near the heel end 2522 of the recessed portion 2580, and a third protruding body 2570B is positioned between the toe and heel end 2518, 2522 of the recessed portion 2580. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can be positioned on the wall 2583 of the recessed portion 2580. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can be positioned on the wall 2583 and the recessed surface 2581 of the recessed portion 2580.
With continued reference to
In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 2566 comprises two weights 2582. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 2566 can comprise one, three or five weights 2582 corresponding with the number of protruding bodies 2570A, B, C. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 2566 can comprise more or less weights 2582 than the number of protruding bodies 2570A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 2566 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine of ten weights 2582.
In embodiments wherein the adjustable weight system 2566 comprises more than one weight 2582, each of the weights 2582 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 2582 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 2582 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 2582 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2582 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2582 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 2582 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2582 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2582. In some embodiments, each of the weights 2582 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 2582 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 2582 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 2582 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 2582, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 2582 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2582 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 2582 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 2582 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 2582 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 2582 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 2582 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2582 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 2582, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2582 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2582 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 2582 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 2510 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 2582 is positioned on the third protruding body 2570B, located between the toe or toe end 2518 and the heel or heel end 2522, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2570A, B near the toe or toe end 2518 and the heel or heel end 2522. The aforementioned weight 2582 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2534 of the club head 2510. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2582 is positioned on the second protruding body 2570B near the heel or heel end 2522, while lighter weights 2582 are positioned on the first protruding body 6270A near the toe or toe end 2518 and on the second protruding body 2570B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 2582 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2522 of the club head 2510. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2582 is positioned on the first protruding body 2570A near the toe or toe end 2518, while lighter weights 2582 are positioned on the second protruding bodies 6270D near the heel or heel end 2522 and on the third protruding body 2570C that is located between the toe or toe end 2518 and the heel or heel end 2522. The aforementioned weight 2582 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2518 of the club head 2510. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2570A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 2570A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 2582 or set of weights 2582.
The adjustable weighting system 2566 of golf club head 2566 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 2566 of golf club head 2566 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 2566 having the adjustable weighting system 2566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the recessed portion 2680 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2666 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 2680 has a maximum depth of 26 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2680 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.26, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 2680 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.26, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the recessed portion 2680 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2683 and the trailing edge 2672 or back end 2634. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 2680 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2680 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.26, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
With reference to
As illustrated in
The protruding bodies 2670A, B, C and the protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F are configured to receive weights 2682, and to hold the weights 2682. For example, to attach a weight 2682 to the club head 2610, the weight 2682 is moved (e.g., slid) into an area between two of the protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F, such that the protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F act as guides located on opposite sides of the weight 2682, and such that the weight 2682 is positioned adjacent to or in contact with the protruding body 2670A, B, C and its corresponding aperture 2671A, B, C. The weight 2682 includes a set of internal threads (e.g., in a blind borehole in the weight 2682). To secure the weight 2682 in place, a fastener 2673 is inserted through the aperture 2671 and into engagement with the internal threads of the weight 2682. The fastener 2673 includes a head 2676 that is larger than the aperture 2671, such that when the fastener 2673 is tightened, the head 2676 presses against the protruding body 2670A, B, C, and the weight 2682 is pressed against the outer surface 2674, thereby holding the weight 2682 within the recessed portion 2680. The additional protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F prevent the weight 2682 from rotating within the recessed portion 2680 after the fastener 2673 has been inserted into the weight 2682. In some embodiments, the fastener 2673 includes a receiving geometry (e.g., a slot or opening on the head 2676), and the receiving geometry mates with a fastening tool (e.g., torque wrench) to tighten or loosen the fastener 2673. It should be noted that the fastener 2673 is comprised of a density that is less than or equal to the density of the club head 2610.
In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C and the additional protruding ribs 2675A, B, C, D, E, F are disposed on other surfaces in the recessed portion 2680. For example, as illustrated schematically in
The weight 2682 may be any shape such as a cube, or any variation thereof. In some embodiments, the weight 2682 is made at least partially of steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, only a portion of the weight 2682 is positioned within the recessed portion 2682 when the weight 2682 is coupled to the club head 2610.
Further, in some embodiments, the weights 2682 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2682 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2682 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 2682 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2682 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2682. In some embodiments, each of the weights 2682 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 2682 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 2682 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 2682 may vary between 0.1-50 g.
For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 2682, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 2682 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2682 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 2682 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 2682 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 2682 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 2682 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 2682 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2682 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 2682, may vary between 5-26 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2682 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2682 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 2682 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 2610 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 2682 is positioned on the third protruding body 2670B, located between the toe or toe end 2618 and the heel or heel end 2622, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2670A, B near the toe or toe end 2618 and the heel or heel end 2622. The aforementioned weight 2682 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2634 of the club head 2610. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2682 is positioned on the second protruding body 2670B near the heel or heel end 2622, while lighter weights 2682 are positioned on the first protruding body 6270A near the toe or toe end 2618 and on the second protruding body 2670B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 2682 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2622 of the club head 2610. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2682 is positioned on the first protruding body 2670A near the toe or toe end 2618, while lighter weights 2682 are positioned on the second protruding bodies 6270C near the heel or heel end 2622 and on the third protruding body 2670B that is located between the toe or toe end 2618 and the heel or heel end 2622. The aforementioned weight 2682 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2618 of the club head 2610. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2670A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding body 2670A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 2682 or set of weights 2682.
The adjustable weighting system 2666 of golf club head 2666 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 2666 of golf club head 2666 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 2666 having the adjustable weighting system 2666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the recessed portion 2780 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 2766 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 2780 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2780 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 2780 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the recessed portion 2780 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 2783 and the trailing edge 2772 or back end 2734. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 2780 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 2780 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated, the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E are disposed within the recessed portion 2780 along the recessed surface 2781 such that one or more weights 2782 may be releasable coupled to the club head 2710 along the recessed portion 2780. More specifically, a first protruding body 2770A is positioned near the first end 2785 or the toe end 2718, a second protruding body 2770C is positioned near the second end 2784 or the heel end 2722, a third protruding body 2770B is positioned between the first and second end 2785, 2784 or between the toe and heel end 2718, 2722. The protruding bodies 2770A, B, C extend from the recessed surface 2781 at or near the trailing edge 2772, such that there is a gap between the protruding body 2770A, B, C, and the wall 2783 configured to receive a weight 2782. Each of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 2710. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E can be positioned on the wall 2783 of the recessed portion 2780. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C can be positioned on the wall 2783 and the recessed surface 2781 of the recessed portion 2780.
With continued reference to
With reference to
With reference to
With reference to
In embodiments wherein the adjustable weight system 2766 comprises more than one weight 2782, each of the weights 2782 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 2782 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 2782 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 2782 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2782 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 2782 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 2782 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 2782 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 2782. In some embodiments, each of the weights 2782 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 2782 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 2782 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 2782 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 2782, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 2782 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2782 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 2782 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 2782 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 2782 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 2782 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 2782 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 2782 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 2782, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 2782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2782 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 2782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 2782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 2782 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 2782 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E to achieve a desired club head 2710 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 2782 is positioned on the protruding body 2770C, located between the toe or toe end 2718 and the heel or heel end 2722, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 2770A,B, D, E near the toe or toe end 2718 and the heel or heel end 2722. The aforementioned weight 2782 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 2734 of the club head 2710. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2782 is positioned on the protruding body 2770E and/or 2770D near the heel or heel end 2722, while lighter weights 2782 are positioned on the protruding body 6270A, B near the toe or toe end 2718 and on the protruding body 2770C that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 2782 positions result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 2722 of the club head 2710. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 2782 is positioned on the protruding body 2770A and/or 2770B near the toe or toe end 2718, while lighter weights 2782 are positioned on the protruding bodies 6270D, E near the heel or heel end 2722 and on the protruding body 2770C that is located between the toe or toe end 2718 and the heel or heel end 2722. The aforementioned weight 2782 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 2718 of the club head 2710. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding bodies 2770A, B, C, D, E has its own corresponding weight 2782 or set of weights 2782.
The adjustable weighting system 2766 of golf club head 2766 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 2766 of golf club head 2766 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 2766 having the adjustable weighting system 2766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
As illustrated in
The protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weight system 3042 are configured to be received by the adjustable weight 3050. The protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weight system 3042 extend perpendicular from the back wall 3066 of the channel 3046 toward the opening 3082 of the adjustable weighting system 3042. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 3054 can comprise at least 1 protruding body 3054, at least 2 protruding bodies 3054, at least 3 protruding bodies 3054, at least 4 protruding bodies 3054, at least 5 protruding bodies 3054, or at least 6 protruding bodies 3054. Further, the protruding bodies 3054 can be evenly spaced apart from a heel end 3030 to a toe end 3026 within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042; while in other embodiments, some of the protruding bodies 3054 are not evenly spaced apart. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 3054 can be spaced out in increments from one another, concentrated near the toe end 3026, near the heel end 3030, bordering the crown 3018, the sole 3022, or the crown 3018 and sole 3022. For example, two protruding bodies 3054 are positioned near the toe end 3026, while one protruding body 3054 is positioned near heel end 3030, or all three protruding 3054 bodies are positioned near the heel end 3030. Each of the protruding bodies 3070A, B, C defining a discrete attachment location for securing a weight to the club head 3010. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion.
The protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 can further comprise a cross-sectional shape. The cross-sectional shape of the protruding bodies 3054 can be cylindrical. In other embodiments, the protruding bodies 3054 can have a square cross-section, a rectangular cross-section, a triangular cross-section, or any other shaped cross-section. In some embodiments, the protruding bodies 3054 can comprise the same cross-sectional shape. For example, all three protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 can comprise a cylindrical cross-sectional shape as illustrated in
The protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 can further still comprise a material. The material of the protruding bodies 3054 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymer components, or any combination thereof. The material of the protruding bodies 3054 can further be a programmed magnet.
As illustrated in
The back surface 3106 of the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a recess 3114 to be configured to receive the protruding bodies 3054. The recess 3114 of the first component 3090 comprises a cross-sectional shape that is complimentary to the cross-sectional shape of the protruding bodies 3054. For example, in some embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the recess 3114 can be cylindrical to house a cylindrical protruding body 3054. In other embodiments, the recess 3114 can comprise a square cross-section, a rectangular cross-section, a triangular cross-section, or any other shape to be complimentary to the cross-sectional shape of the protruding bodies 3054.
The first component 3090 further comprises a material. The material of the first component 3090 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymers components, or any combination thereof. The material of the first component 3090 can further be a programmable magnet. A programmable magnet is a magnetic structure that is coded with distinctive correlating patterns with alternating polarity, designed to achieve a desired behavior. The different desired behaviors achieved by the programmable magnet are aligning, attaching, latching, and spring. The programmable magnets used herein are coded to display spring-like behaviors. The programmed magnets comprise an equilibrium point wherein the programmed magnets either repel or attract one another to constantly reach this equilibrium point. If the programmed magnets were be pushed together, they would repel, and if they were pulled apart, they would attract. The programmed magnet can be coded to comprise an equilibrium point as described above, but can be further coded to attract and attach when the programmed magnets are aligned in a certain configuration relative to one another. In some embodiments, the first component comprises a programmable magnet material.
The second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a front surface 3118, a back surface 3122, facing the front surface 3118 of the first component 3090, and an aperture 3126 housing the third component 3098. The second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 further comprises a minimum width 3130 and a maximum width 3134. The minimum width 3130 of the second component 3094 is less than the opening distance 3086 of the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042. The maximum width 3134 of the second component 3094 is greater than the opening distance 3086 of the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042.
The second component 3094 further comprises a material. The material of the second component 3094 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymer components, or any combination thereof. The material of the second component 3094 can further be a programmable magnet similar to the spring-like programmed magnet as described above.
As illustrated in
The third component 3098 of the adjustable weight 3050 further comprises a material. The material of the third component 3098 can be steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, composite polymer material, non-metallic materials, polymer components, or any combination thereof.
In other embodiments, as illustrated in
In some embodiments, the first and second components 3090 and 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 can comprise the same material. In other embodiments, the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050 can comprise a different material than the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050. In other embodiments, the third component 3098 can comprise a different material than the first and second component 3090 and 3094, or the same material as the first component 3090, the second component 3094, or both the first and second component 3090 and 3094.
In some embodiments, wherein the first and second components 3090 and 3094 comprise a programmable magnet, the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 are programmed to have spring like behaviors. When no force is acting on the first and second components 3090 and 3094 to compress or expand from one another, the adjustable weight 3050 is at equilibrium (first component 3090 and second component 3094 are at a constant distance from one another). When the first and second components 3090 and 3094 are compressed together, the adjustable weight 3050 is trying to reach equilibrium. When the adjustable weight 3050 tries to reach equilibrium, the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 repels against the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050.
In alternative embodiments, wherein the first and second components 3090 and 3094 comprise a programmable magnet, the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 are programmed to have spring like behaviors. The adjustable weight 3050 is at equilibrium (as described above), when the first and second component 3090 and 3094 are aligned in one configuration, and are attracted to one another and attached, when the second component 3094 is rotated to be aligned in another configuration relative to the first component 3090.
In other embodiments, where the adjustable weight 3050 comprises the first component, 3090, the second component 3094, the third component 3098, and the fourth component 3146, the fourth component 3146 provides the adjustable weight 3050 spring-like behaviors as described above. When no force is acting on the first, second and fourth component 3090, 3094, and 3146, the adjustable weight 3050 is at equilibrium (first component 3090 and second component 3094 are at a constant distance from one another). When the first and second components 3090 and 3094 are compresses together, the fourth component 3146 expands against the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 to regain equilibrium.
As illustrated in
A tool is then applied to the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 to transition the adjustable weight 3050 into a second configuration 3162 as illustrated in
The tool can also transition the adjustable weight 3050 back into the first configuration 3158. The tool further compresses the second component 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050 toward the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050, and then rotates the second component 3094 about the third component 3098 into the first configuration. The front surface 3118 of the second component 3094 no longer abuts the inner wall 3070 of the top and bottom lip 3074 and 3078, thus not creating a press fit of the adjustable weight 3050 within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042. Once the recess 3114 of the first component 3090 of the adjustable weight 3050 releases one of the protruding bodies 3054, the adjustable weight 305 can reposition within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 to another one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C.
In another embodiment, the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a first, a second, a third and a fourth component 3090, 3094, 3098, and 3146. In this embodiment, the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 comprise a material that is not a programmable magnet. The adjustable weight 3050 is modified from a first configuration 3158 to a second configuration 3162 in a similar fashion using the tool as described above. When the adjustable weight 3050 is in the second configuration 3162, the fourth component 3146 is compressed and thus pushes against the first and second component 3090 and 3094 of the adjustable weight 3050. The pushing of the fourth component 3146 on the first and second component 3090 and 3094 creates a press fit within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042. The press fit of the adjustable weight 3050 within the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 secures the adjustable weight 3050 onto one of the protruding bodies and thus prevent the center of gravity and moment of inertia from changing post adjustment.
In another embodiment (not pictured), the adjustable weight 3050 comprises a first and a second component 3090 and 3094 void of a third component 3098 positioned between the first and second components 3090 and 3094. In this embodiment, the first component 3090 and the second component 3094 comprise a material that is a programmable magnet. Further, in this embodiment, the protruding bodies 3054 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 comprise a material that is a programmable magnet. When the second component 3094 is aligned in one configuration relative to the first component 3090, the first and second component 3090 and 3094 are at an equilibrium point and are non-adjacent to one another. When the adjustable weight 3050 are at an equilibrium point, the adjustable weight 3050 can be positioned anywhere along the channel 3046 of the adjustable weight 3042 system corresponding with the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C. When positioning the adjustable weight 3050 within the channel 3046 in a desired location for CG and MOI, the adjustable weight 3050 can be positioned over one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C. Using a tool, the second component 3094 can then be rotated to be aligned in another configuration relative to the first component 3090, wherein the first component 3090, the second component 3094 and the protruding body 3054 positioned underneath the recess 3114 on the back surface 3106 of the first component 3090 attract one another and attach at that distinct location within the channel 3046.
These embodiments allow an end user the ability to adjust placement of the adjustable weight 3050 along the channel 3046 of the adjustable weighting system 3042 at the distinct locations of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C to affect the center of gravity, moment of inertia and the heel/toe bias of the club head. Affecting the center of gravity, moment of inertia and heel/toe bias of the club head allow for the end user to achieve desired performance characteristics. Altering the moment of inertia of the club head can in turn alter the forgiveness of the golf club, flight direction of the golf ball.
Referring to
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the adjustable weights 3050 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the adjustable weights 3050 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different adjustable weights 3050 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the adjustable weights 3050 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one adjustable weight 3050 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining adjustable weights 3050 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the adjustable weights 3050 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one adjustable weight 3050 may have a greater volume than the remaining adjustable weights 3050. In some embodiments, each of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the adjustable weights 3050 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 3082 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C. In some embodiments, the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of adjustable weights 3050, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the adjustable weights 3050 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 0-10 g, a second adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 10-20 g, a third adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second adjustable weight 3050 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth adjustable weight 3050, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first adjustable weight 3050 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first adjustable weight 3050 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first adjustable weight 3050 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third adjustable weight 3050 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The adjustable weights 3050 may be strategically positioned on the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 3010 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier adjustable weight 3050 is positioned on the protruding body 3054B, located between the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022, while lighter weights are positioned on the protruding bodies 3054A, C near the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022. The aforementioned adjustable weight 3050 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 3034 of the club head 3010. In some embodiments, a heavier adjustable weight 3050 is positioned on the protruding bodies 3054C near the heel or heel end 3022, while lighter adjustable weights 3050 are positioned on the protruding body 3054A near the toe or toe end 3018 and on the protruding body 3054B that is located between the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022. The aforementioned adjustable weight 3050 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 3022 of the club head 3010. In some embodiments, a heavier adjustable weight 3050 is positioned on the protruding body 3054A near the toe or toe end 3018, while lighter adjustable weights 3050 are positioned on the protruding body 3054C near the heel or heel end 3022 and on the protruding body 3054B that is located between the toe or toe end 3018 and the heel or heel end 3022. The aforementioned adjustable weight 3050 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 3018 of the club head 3010. In many embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the protruding bodies 3054A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each protruding bodies 3054A, B, C has its own corresponding adjustable weight 3050 or set of adjustable weights 3050.
The adjustable weighting system 3066 of golf club head 3066 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3066 of golf club head 3066 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 3066 having the adjustable weighting system 3066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With respect to any of the embodiments discussed above,
With respect to any of the embodiments discussed above
As illustrated in
In many embodiments, the recessed portion 3280 includes a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3270 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 3270 of the recessed portion 3280 are defined as indentations within the wall 3283 adjacent a trailing edge 3272, wherein the features 3270 can comprise a portion of the wall 3283. The features 3270 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3282 to the club head 3210. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In one embodiment as illustrated in
In one embodiment, two of the features 3270 are located generally at the heel end 3222 of the club head 3210, and the remaining two features 3270 are located generally at the toe end 3218 of the club head 3210, wherein the position of the features 3270 is symmetrical from the heel end 3222 to the toe end 3218. In other embodiments, the position of the features 3270 is not symmetrical. In other embodiments still, the recessed portion 3280 can comprise any number combination of features on the heel end 3222, and the toe end 3218. For example, the recessed portion 3280 can comprise two features 3270 in the heel end 3222 and one feature on the toe end 3218, or the recessed portion 3280 can comprise three features 3270 on both the heel end 3222, and the toe end 3218.
The features 3270 are configured to receive weights 3282. The different positions of the features 3270 in the recessed portion 3280 allow for adjustment of the center of gravity based on the different positioning and distribution of the weights 3282. The weights 3282 comprise a top surface 3287, a bottom surface 3288, and sidewalls 3289. The weights 3282 further comprise a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. In some embodiments as illustrated in
The weights 3282 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weights 3282 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3282 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 3210 comprises multiple weights 3282, the weights 3282 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 3210 comprises three weights 3282 with the first weight 3282 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3282 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the club head 3210 comprises four weights 3282 with the first weight 3282 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3282 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3282 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3282 having a mass of 7 grams.
The weights 3282 can further comprise a groove 3271. The groove 3271 is positioned on one of the sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282. The groove 3271 is oriented parallel to the top and bottom surface 3287 and 3288. The grooves 3271 comprise a partial circle shape. In other embodiments, the weights 3282 is void of the groove 3271 and can comprise an aperture extending through a center of the weights 3282 instead. The apertures is oriented parallel to the top and bottom surface 3287 and 3288. The groove 3271 or aperture are configured to receive the cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266. In other embodiments (not pictured), the weights 3282 can be void of the groove 3271 and comprise ribs configured to receive the cable 3269.
The adjustable weighting system 3266 is positioned within the recessed portion 3280 on the sole 3230 of the club head body 3214. As stated above, the adjustable weighting system 3266 comprises the tensioner 3267 and the cable 3269 configured to be attached to the tensioner 3267. As illustrated in
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3267 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism, wherein the winch and ratchet mechanism reels in a cable and comprises an automatic locking system when it rotates clockwise, preventing counterclockwise movement without user input. The tensioner 3267 is configured to be attached to the cable 3269. The tensioner 3267 can be rotated to manipulate the amount of the cable 3269 is free, wherein when the tensioner 3267 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3269 winds up around the tensioner 3267. The winch and ratchet mechanism prevents the tensioner from rotating counterclockwise, therefore preventing the cable 3269 from unwinding.
In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 3266 can comprise a tensioner, wherein the tensioner is a J-slot tensioner 3267A as illustrated in
The cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266 is configured to be receive by the tensioner 3267, and runs along the wall 3283 of the recessed portion 3280, held in place by guide elements 3275. The cable 3269 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 3269 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
In some embodiments, as illustrated in
The tensioner 3267 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3269. When the tensioner 3267 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3269 winds around the tensioner 3267 and is tightened, increasing the cable tension. The tightened cable 3269 presses on the groove 3271 of the weights 3282. The sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282 abut against the features 3270, wherein the weights 3282 can be flush with the outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230. In other embodiments, when the sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282 abut against the features 3270, the weights 3282 can extend past the outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230, however, still do not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3210 when at address. In other embodiments still, when the sidewalls 3289 of the weights 3282 abut against the features 3270, the weights 3282 do not extend to, or past the outer surface 3274 of the sole 3230. In other embodiments, the cable 3269 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3267.
When the tensioner 3267 is in a released orientation (i.e., pressed downward, or pulled upward), the cable 3269 unwinds from the tensioner 3267, wherein the tension in the cable 3269 decrease. As the tension in the cable 3269 decreases, the cable 3269 loosens and the weights 3282 are no longer pressed against the features 3270. The weights 3282 can then be repositioned by an end user to different features 3270 in the recessed portion 3280 and secured into place by manipulating the tensioner 3267 as stated above. In embodiments where the weights 3282 comprise an aperture instead of the groove 3271, the weights 3282 can be slid along the cable 3269 to reposition the weights 3282, without being removed from the cable 3269. Repositioning the weights 3282 reconfigures the center of gravity (CG) of the club head 3210. For example, the weights 3282 can be positioned in the second feature 3270D near the toe end 3218 to shift the CG toward the toe end 3218 to correct ball trajectory for players who are typically slice a ball. For another example, the weights 3282 can be positioned in the feature 3270A near the heel end 3222 to shift the CG toward the heel end 3222 to correct ball trajectory for players who typically hook the ball.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3267 is in a naturally locked position wherein the tensioner 3267 can be pressed downward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to loosen the cable 3269. Similar to the description above, the tensioner 3267 can be rotated clockwise to tighten and generate a desired tension to hold the weight or weights 3282 in place in the features 3270. To loosen the cable and release the tension from the weights 3282, the tensioner 3267 pressed downward toward the club head 3210. When the tension is released (i.e., when the cable 3269 is loosen/extended), the cable 3269 can be removed from the groove 3271 of the weight or weights 3282, and the weight or weights 3282 can then be removed entirely from the club head 3210. The weight or weights 3282 can then be repositioned into a different feature 3270 along the club head 3210, in order to change the CG of the club head 3210. When the weight or weights 3282 are positioned into place within the features 3270, the tensioner 3267 can be pulled upward and rotated clockwise to tighten the weights 3282. The tensioner 3267 is automatically locked and is prevented in rotating counterclockwise (i.e., unwinding the cable 3269). In other embodiments, the tensioner 3267 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 3267 is pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3269. In other embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3267 to release and/or increase tension in the cable 3267.
The club head 3210 having the adjustable weighting system 3266 comprising the tensioner 3267 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3269 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3266 allows for the club head 3210 to adjust the already low and back CG about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 3210 having the tensioner 3267 and the cable 3269 adjustable weight system 3266 further has an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3282 coupled to the club head 3210 are secured by the tension of the cable 3269, which create a friction between a surface of the weight(s) 3282 and the recessed surface 3281 of the club head 3210. The tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3210 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3282. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3210 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension and friction created by the cable 3269 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3282 and club head 3210 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the screw-type fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3274 of the club head 3210. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3282 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3230 because the weight(s) 3282 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3269 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3269 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3210. The material and pattern of the cable 3269 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3269 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3266 of golf club head 3210 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3266 of golf club head 3210 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 3210 having the adjustable weighting system 3266 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 3366 is positioned on a sole 3330 of the club head 3310. As illustrated in
In many embodiments, the channels 3213 system includes a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3370 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 3370 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3382 to the club head 3310. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The features 3370 of the channels 3213 are defined as indentations within the walls 3383 of the channel 3213 near the trialing edge 3372. As illustrated in
In some embodiments, the features 3370 can be positioned at the wall 3383 of the channel 3213 adjacent the trailing edge 3372. In other embodiments, the features 3370 can be positioned at the wall 3383 adjacent the polygonal sectioned portions 3311 as illustrated in
The weights 3382 of the club head 3310 can be similar to the weights 3282 of the club head 3210. The weights 3382 are configured to be received within the features 3370 of the channels 3213. The weights 3382 comprise a top surface 3387, a bottom surface 3388, and sidewalls 3389. The weights 3382 further comprise a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. In many embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weights 3382 are complimentary to the profile shape of the features 3370. The club head 3310 can comprise any number of weight 3382. For example, in some embodiments, the club head 3310 can comprise one weight 3382, two weights 3382, three weights 3382, four weights 3382, five weights 3382, six weights 3382, seven weights 3382, or eight weights 3382. When the weights 3382 are positioned in the features 3370, the weights 3382 are flush with the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330. In other embodiments, when the weights 3382 are positioned in the features 3370, the weight 3382 can extend past the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330, but not past the lowest point of the club head 3310 is at address. In other embodiments still, the weight 3382 does not extend to or past the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330.
The weights 3382 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weights 3382 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3382 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 3310 comprises multiple weights 3382, the weights 3382 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 3310 comprises three weights 3382 with the first weight 3382 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3382 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the club head 3310 comprises four weights 3382 with the first weight 3382 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3382 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3382 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3382 having a mass of 7 grams.
The weight 3382 can further comprise a groove 3371. The groove 3371 is positioned on one of the sidewalls 3389 of the weights 3382, oriented parallel to the top and bottom surface 3387 and 3388, and is configured to receive the cable 3369. In some embodiments the groove 3371 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to retrieve and facilitate retention of the cable 3369.
The adjustable weighting mechanism 3366 comprises the tensioner 3367 and the cable 3369. The tensioner 3367 is positioned in a general center location on the sole 3330, disposed at a junction of where the channels 3213 radially extend. Although in other embodiments the tensioner 3367 can be positioned at other locations along the sole 3330 of the club head 3310, as long as the tensioner 3367 is disposed at a junction of wherein the channels 3213 radially extend. The tensioner 3367 can be attached to the club head 3310 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 3367 is attached to the club head 3310, the tensioner 3367 does not extend past the lowest part of the club head 3310 when at address, thereby not obstructing a player's swing. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3367 can be flush with the outer surface 3374 of the sole 3330.
The cable 3369 of the adjustable weighting system 3366 is similar to the cable 3269 of the adjustable weighting system 3266 (e.g., material, etc.). The cable 3369 is configured to be received be the tensioner 3367 and the channels 3213. In
The tensioner 3367 is similar to the tensioner 3267 of the club head 3210, wherein the tensioner acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism configured to receive the cable 3369. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3367 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. When the cable 3369 is coupled to the tensioner 3367, the tensioner 3367 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3369. The cable 3369, in turn, is coupled to (to include being pressed against) the groove 3371 or aperture of the weights 3382, and extends within one or more of the various channels 3313 defined along the bottom or sole 3330. When the tensioner 3367 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3369 is tightened, and the cable 3369 presses the weight or weights 3382 creating a force firmly against the weight or weights 3382 on the walls 3383 of the club head body 3310, wherein the sidewalls 3389 of the weight or weights 3382 abut the walls of the features 3370. As illustrated in
The tensioner 3367 can (pulled upward and/or pressed downward) to decrease the tension in the cable 3369. As the tension decreases in the cable 3369, the cable loosens and the weights 3382 can then be repositioned (or slid for the weights 3382 with the apertures) to different features 3370 on the sole 3330 to adjust the CG. For example, the weights 3382 can be repositioned to from the third feature 3370B to the second feature 3370D near the heel end 3322 to correct ball flight for a player who typically hooks the ball. In some embodiments, during adjustment of the weight 3382, a portion of the cable 3369 can be moved to a different channel 3313, depending upon a number of weights 3282 being used. In other embodiments, the cable 3369 can be loosen by other means other than by the tensioner 3367.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3367 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3367 is pressed downward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3369. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3369 is extended), the cable 3369 may be removed from the groove 3371 of the weight 3382, and the weight 3382 may then be removed entirely from the club head 3310. The weight 3382 can than be repositioned into a different, discrete feature 3370 along the club head 3310, in order to change a CG of the club head 3310. In other embodiments, the tensioner is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3367 is pulled upward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3369. In other embodiments, a tool is required to engage and rotate the tensioner 3367 and/or to release tension in the cable 3367.
The club head 3310 having the adjustable weighting system 3366 comprises the tensioner (or other adjustment means) and the cable described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3366 allows for the club head 3310 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows for players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
The club head 3310 having the tensioner 3367 and the cable 3369 adjustable weight system 3366 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3382 coupled to the club head 3310 are secured by the tension of the cable 3369, which create a friction between the surfaces of the weight(s) 3382 and a surface of the features 3370. The tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3310 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3382. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3310 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension and friction created by the cable 3369 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3382 and the club head 3310 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3369 of the adjustable weighting system 3366 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 3374 of the club head 3310. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3382 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3330 because the weight(s) 3382 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3369 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3369 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3310. The material and pattern of the cable 3369 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3310 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3366 of golf club head 3310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3366 of golf club head 3310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 3310 having the adjustable weighting system 3366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 3466 is positioned on a sole 3430 of the club head 3410. As illustrated in
In some embodiments, the visual details 3415 of the club head 3410 can be aesthetic lines flush with the surface of the sole. In other embodiments, the visual details 3415 can be raised lines extending from the outer surface 3474 of the sole 3430. In other embodiments still, the visual details 3415 can be indentations or grooves into the outer surface 3474 of the sole 3430. In the embodiments wherein the visual details 3415 are grooves, the visual details 3415 can be configured to receive the weights 3482 and the cable 3469.
Illustrated in
In many embodiments, the weights 3482 further comprises a groove (not pictured). The groove is positioned on the top surface of the weights 3482, extending in a direction from the first end to the second end of the weights 3482. The groove of the weights 3482 is configured to receive the cable 3469. In other embodiments, instead of the groove, the weights 3482 can comprise an aperture (not pictured) extending through the center from the first end to the second end of the weights 3482. The aperture of the weights 3482 is configured to receive the cable 3469.
In some embodiments, the weights 3482 can further comprise a friction member (not pictured). The friction member is positioned on the bottom surface of the weights 3482. In other embodiments, the friction member can be positioned on the sidewalls of the weights 3482. In other embodiments still, the friction member can be positioned on a combination of the bottom surface, and the sidewalls of the weights 3482. The friction member allows for dampening of sound and vibration during impact with a ball. The friction member helps secure and further prevents the weights 3482 from shifting within the channel 3413 when the weights 3482 are locked in place by cable tension.
The adjustable weighting system 3466 comprises the tensioner 3467 and the cable 3469. As illustrated in
The cable 3469 of the adjustable weighting system 3410 is similar to the cables 3269, and 3369 as described above. The cable 3469 is configured to be attached to the tensioner 3467 and within the channel 3413. In other embodiments, the cable 3469 can extend and retract by other means other than the tensioner 3467. The cable 3469 can be received within the channel 3413 or any of the visual details 3415. The cable 3469 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 3469 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
The tensioner 3467 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3467 is a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3467 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. When the cable 3469 is coupled to the tensioner 3467, the tensioner 367 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3469. The cable 3469, in turn, is coupled to the groove of the weights 3482 (or the cable 3569 passes through an aperture weights 3482), and such that the cable 3469 presses the weight or weights 3482 against the channel floor 3481 and channel walls 3483 of the channels 3413. In some embodiments, the sidewalls of the weights 3482 abut against the channel walls 3483 and channel floor 3481. In other embodiments with weights 3482 having friction members, the friction members in combination with the sidewalls of the weights 3482 can abut the channel walls 3483 and channel floor 3481.
The tensioner 3467 can be pushed downward, or pulled upward to release the tension and loosen the cable 3469. Once the cable 3469 is loosened, the weights 3482 can be taken out and repositioned anywhere along the channel 3413. In embodiments with weights 3482 having apertures instead of grooves, the weights can be slid within the channel 3413 without being removed from the cable 3469. Once the weights 3482 are repositioned, the tensioner 3467 can tighten up the cable 3469 to secure the weights 3482 within the channel 3413 by tension and friction. The ability to reposition the weights 3482 to different positioned along the channel 3413 allows for an end user to adjust the CG of the club head 3410. For example, the weight 3482 can be repositioned from near the toe end 3418 to near the heel end 3422, wherein ball trajectory can be corrected for a player who tends to hook the ball. In other embodiments, the cable 3469 can be tightened/loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3467.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3467 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3467 is pressed downward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension from the cables 3469. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3469 is extended), the weight 3482 may then be repositioned into a different area along the channels 3413, so as to change a center of gravity of the club head 3410. In some embodiments, the tensioner 3467 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3467 is pulled upward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension from the cables 3469. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3467 and/or to release tension in the cable 3467.
The club head 3410 having the adjustable weighting system 3466 comprises a tensioner 3467 (or other adjustment means) and the cable 3469 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3466 allows for the club head 3410 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high MOI similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
The club 3410 head having the tensioner 3467 and the cable 3469 adjustable weight system further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3482 coupled to the channel 3413 are secured by the tension of the cable 3469, which create a friction between a surface of the weight(s) 3482 and the channel walls 3483 and the channel floor 3481 of the channel 3413. The tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3410 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3482. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3482 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension and friction created by the cable 3469 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3482 and club head 3410 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3469 of the adjustable weighting system 3466 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channel(s) 3413 in a number of different patterns on the club head 3410. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3482 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3430 because the weight(s) 3430 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3469 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3469 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3410. The material and pattern of the cable 3469 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3410 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3466 of golf club head 3410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3466 of golf club head 3410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the lightweight adjustable weighting system 3466, and lack of a complex internal/external weight housing structure. The club head 3410 having the adjustable weighting system 3466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
In some embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 3566 is positioned within a shallow recessed portion 3580 of a sole 3530 of the club head 3510. The recessed portion 3580 is shallow and does not comprise complex geometries compared to other club heads with deep, complex and heavy weight ports. In other embodiments, the club head 3510 is void of the recessed portion 3580 and the adjustable weighting system 3566 is positioned on an outer surface 3574 of the sole 3530. As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 3566 comprises the tensioner 3567, the cable 3569, and a plurality of guide elements 3575. The tensioner 3567 is positioned generally centrally on the sole 3530 (or centrally on the sole 3530 within the recessed portion 3580) of the club head 3510, although in other embodiments the tensioner 3567 can be positioned at other locations along the club head 3510. For example, the tensioner 3567 can be positioned near the toe end 3518, near the heel end 3522, or adjacent to the trailing edge 3574. The tensioner 3567 can be attached to the club head by way of adhesive if by fasteners. When the tensioner 3567 is attached to the club head 3510, the tensioner 3567 does not extend past the lowest part of the club head 3510 when at address, thereby not obstructing a player's swing. In some embodiments, the tensioner 3567 is flush with the outer surface 3574 of the sole 3530.
The plurality of guide elements 3575 of the adjustable weighting system 3566 are configured to receive and guide the cable 3569. The guide elements 3575 are positioned adjacent a trailing edge 3572 along the toe end 3518, the rear 3523, and the heel end 3522 of the club head 3510. In embodiments with the recessed portion 3580, the guide elements 3575 are positioned adjacent the trailing edge 3572, extending from the wall 3583. In the illustrated embodiment, the club head 3510 comprises five guide elements 3573: a first guide element 3573A near the toe end 3518, a second guide element 3573E near the heel end 3522, a third guide element 3573C in a general center between the first guide element 3573A and the second guide element 3573E, a fourth guide element 3573B between the first guide element 3573A and third guide element 3575C, and a fifth guide 3573D between the second guide element 3573E and the third guide element 3573C. Although in other embodiments, the club had 3510 can comprise different numbers of guide elements 3573, as well as different locations for the guide elements 3573. For example, the club head 3510 can comprise one guide element 3573, two guide elements 3573, three guide elements 3573, four guide elements 3573, five guide elements 3573, six guide elements 3573, guide elements 3573, seven guide elements 3573, or eight guide elements 3573. The cable 3569 is engaged with the guide elements 3573, which re-route the cable or cables 3569 back toward the tensioner 3567, thus forming a crisscrossing network that provides a variety of different positions and numbers of different positions (e.g., one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, or eight, etc.) for the weight or weights 3582.
The cable 3569 of the adjustable weighting system 3566 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, and 3469 (e.g., the material used for the cables, the measurements of the cables, etc.). The cable 3569 is configured to be received by the tensioner 3567 and the guide elements 3575. The cable 3579 can be fed within the tensioner 3567, and is looped to different guide elements 3575 to create a web-like design on a portion of the sole 3530. In some embodiments, the cable 3569 can be attached to the tensioner 3567, and some of the guide members 3575, wherein the remaining guide elements 3575 do not receive the cable 3569. For example in embodiments with four guide elements 3573, the cable 3569 is received by the first and third guide elements 3575A and 3573B near the toe end 3518, while the second and fourth guide elements 3575D and 3575C near the heel end 3522 are void of the cable 3569. In another example, the cable 3569 is received by every other guide element 3575 for a more spaced out web-like design. The cable 3569 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 3569 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
The cable 3569 is further configured to be received by a groove 3571 of a weight 3582 The weight 3582 of the club head 3510 can be similar to the weights 3282, 3382, and 3482 as described above. The weight 3582 comprise a top surface, and a bottom surface. The top surface comprises the groove 3571. The groove 3571 is configured to receive the cable 3569 of the adjustable weighting system 3566. In some embodiments the groove 3571 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to facilitate retention of the cable 3569 along the top surface of the weight 3582. In some embodiments void of the groove 3583, the weight 3582 comprises a through aperture (not pictured) to receive the cable 3569, such that the weight 3582 may slide along the cable 3569. The weights 3582 further comprise a cross-sectional shape generally curved to the contour of the recessed surface 3581 (or the outer surface 3574) of the sole 3530. In some embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weights 3582 can be a cube, a rectangular prism, a curved rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or any polygonal shape. In many embodiments, the club head 3510 can comprise any number of weights, such as one weight 3582, two weights 3582, three weights 3582, four weights 3582, five weights 3582, six weights 3582, seven weights 3582, or eight weights 3582.
In some embodiments, the weights 3582 can further comprise a friction member positioned on the bottom surface of the weights 3582. The friction member can be made of polymers such as low-density polyethylene (LDPE), high-density polyethylene (HDPE), polypropylene (PP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polystyrene (PS), teflon (Polytetrafluoroethylene), thermoplastic polyurethanes, natural polyisoprene, synthetic polyisoprene, polybutadiene, chloroprene rubber, butyl rubber, styrene-butadiene nitrile rubber or any other polymer, elastomers, and friction/dampening material. When the weight 3582 is coupled to the adjustable weighting system 3566, the friction member on the weight 4982 is adjacent the recessed surface 3581 (or outer surface 3574) of the sole 3530, which creates a frictional force to prevent the weight 3582 from shifting on the sole 3530. The friction member can be attached to the weights 3582 by adhesion or any other means. The friction member can further act as a dampener for sound and vibration. Dampening the sound and vibration can be more pleasing to an end user, as well as relieve stress during impact.
The intricate web-like design of the cable 3569 allows for the weights 3582 to be positioned onto the club head 3510 at multiple locations. For example, the weight 3582 can be positioned on the club head near the toe end 3518, near the toe end 3518 proximate the rear 3523, near the toe end 3518 proximate the center of the club head 3510, near the toe end 3518 proximate the strikface, near the heel end 3522, near the heel end 3522 proximate the rear 3523, near the heel end proximate the strikeface, or near the heel end 3522 proximate the center of the club head 3510. Having multiple locations to place the weight 3582 can help the end user to fine tune the CG of the club head 3510 to help correct hook, slice, or ball spin.
The tensioner 3567 is similar to the tensioner 3267, 3367, and 3467, wherein the tensioner acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3567 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. When the cable 3569 is coupled to the tensioner 3567, the tensioner 3567 can be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable or cables 3569. The cable 3569, in turn, is coupled to the groove 3571 of the weight 3582. In other embodiments, the cable 3569 receive through the aperture of the weight 3582. When the tensioner 3567 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3569 is tightened, and the cable 3569 presses on the groove 3572 (or aperture) of the weight 3582 creating a force on the weight 3582 firmly against the recessed surface 3581 (or outer surface 3574). In some embodiments, the force created by the tension placed on the weight 3582 against the sole 3530 of the club head 3510 secures the weight 3582 onto the club head 3510. In other embodiments, wherein the weight 3582 comprise the friction member, a frictional force is created between the abutting surfaces of the friction member of the weight 3582 and of sole 3530 of the club head 3510. The two forces created secures the weight 3582 onto the club head 3510 and prevents the weight 3582 from sliding or shifting on the sole 3530. In other embodiments, the cable 3569 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3567.
The tensioner 3567 can be pressed downward (or pulled upward) to decrease the tension in the cable 3569 and loosen the cable 3569 on the weigh 3582. When the cable 3569 is loose, the weight 3582 can be repositioned to a different location the club head 3510. In embodiments where the weight 3582 comprise an aperture instead of the groove 3571, the weight 3582 can be slid along the cable 3569 to be repositioned to different locations on the club head 3510. Reposition the weight 3582 can affect the CG. For example, the weights 3582 can be positioned near the heel end 3522 to correct ball trajectory for a player who tends to hook the ball. In another example, the weights 3582 can be positioned near the toe end 3518 and more back toward the trailing edge 3572 to correct ball trajectory for a player who tends to slice the ball and decreased ball spin. In other embodiments, the cable 3569 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3567.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3567 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3567 is pressed downward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism, to release the tension of in the cable 3569. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3569 is loosened), the weight 3582 may then be repositioned into different areas along the club head 3510 to adjust the center of gravity without the restriction of distinct locations. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3567 is naturally in a locked position, wherein the tensioner 3567 is pulled upward to engage the winch and ratchet mechanism, to release the tension of in the cable 3569. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3567 and/or to release tension in the cable 3569.
The club head 3510 having the adjustable weighting system 3566 comprises a tensioner 3567 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3569 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3566 allows for the club head 3510 to adjust the already low and back CG about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high MOI similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
The club head 3510 having the tensioner 3567 and the cable 3569 adjustable weight system 3566 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3582 coupled to the club head body 3514 are secured by the tension of the cable 3569, which create a friction between the friction member of the weight(s) 5382 and the recessed surface 3581 (or outer surface 3574) of the sole 3530. The tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 3510 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s). Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3510 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension and friction created by the cable 3569 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3582 and club head 3510 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3569 of the adjustable weighting system 3566 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on the sole 3530 of the club head 3510. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3582 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3530 because the weight(s) 3582 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3569 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3569 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3510. The material and pattern of the cable 3569 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3510 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3566 of golf club head 3510 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3566 of golf club head 3510 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the lightweight adjustable weighting system 3566, and lack of a complex internal/external weight housing structures. The club head 3510 having the adjustable weighting system 3566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 3666 is positioned on a sole 3630 of the club head 3610. As illustrated in
As illustrated in
The weights 3682 configured to be received by the features 3670 are similar to the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, and 3582 as described above. The weights 3682 comprise a general shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. As illustrated in
The weights 3682 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weights 3682 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3782 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 6210 comprises multiple weights 3682, the weights 3682 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 3610 comprises three weights 3682 with the first weight 3682 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3682 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the club head 3610 comprises four weights 3682 with the first weight 3682 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3682 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3682 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3682 having a mass of 7 grams.
In some embodiments, the weights 3682 comprise a groove 3671 on a surface of the weights 3682 exposed when positioned within the features 3670. The groove 3671 is configured to receive the cable 3669 of the adjustable weighting system 3666. In some embodiments the groove 3671 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to facilitate retention of the cable 3669 along the surface of the weight 3682. In some embodiments void of the groove 3671, the weight 3582 comprises a through aperture (not pictured) to receive the cable 3669, such that the weight 3682 may slide along the cable 3669.
The adjustable weighting system 3666 comprises the tensioner 3667, and the cable 3669. As illustrated in
The cable 3669 of the adjustable weighing system 3666 is similar to the cable 3267, 3367, 3467, and 3567 as described above (e.g., measurements, materials, etc.). The cable 3669 is configured to be couple to the tensioner 3667 and received within the channel 3613. The cable 3669 is further received within the groove 3671 of the weights 3682. The cable 3669 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 3669 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
The tensioner 3667 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, and 3567 wherein the tensioner acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3667 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 3667 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3669. The cable 3669, in turn, is coupled to the weights 3682 (e.g., positioned along an external groove 3671 or within the aperture in the weights 3682). When the tensioner 3667 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3669 is tightened, and the cable 3669 presses on the weights 3682 to abut against the features 3670 of the channel 3613. The tension of the cable 3669 on the weights 3682 create a force on the weights 3682 onto the wall 4683, and bottom wall 3681 of the features 3670 to prevent the weights 3682 from popping out or shifting within the channel 3613.
The tensioner 3667 can be pressed downward (or pulled upward) to release the tension to loosen the cable 3669. As the cable 3669 loosens, the weights 3682 can then be taken out of the features 3670 and repositioned to a different feature 3670 to adjust the CG of the club head 3610. For example, the weights 3682 can be repositioned from a feature 3670 near the heel to the feature 3670 near the toe end 3618 to correct a player who tends to slice the ball. In embodiments where the weights 3682 comprise an aperture instead of a groove 3671, the weights 3682 can be taken out of the features 3670 and can slide along the cable 3669 (without being removed from the cable 3669) to be repositioned. In some embodiments, the tensioner 3667 is naturally in a locked stated, wherein the tensioner 3667 must be pressed-down to engage the rotation movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3669. In some embodiments, the tensioner 3667 is naturally in a locked stated, wherein the tensioner 3667 must be pulled upward to engage the rotation movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to loosen the cable 3669. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3667 to increase tension, and/or to release tension in the cable 3669. In other embodiments, the cable 4669 can be retracted/loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3667.
The club head 3610 having the adjustable weighting system 3666 comprises a tensioner 3667 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3669 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3666 allows for the club head 3610 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 3610 having the tensioner 3667 and the cable 3669 adjustable weight system 3666 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3682 coupled to the club head body 3614 are secured by the tension of the cable 3669, which create a force on the weight(s) 3682 onto the feature 3670. The tension produced force eliminates the need for the club head 3610 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3682. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3610 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension produced force created by the cable further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3682 and club head 3610 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3669 of the adjustable weighting system 3666 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channel 3613 in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3674 of the club head. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3682 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3630 because the weight(s) 3682 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3669 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3669 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3610. The material and pattern of the cable 3610 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3666 of golf club head 3610 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3666 of golf club head 3610 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 3610 having the adjustable weighting system 3666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above
The adjustable weighting system 3766 is positioned on a sole 3730 of the club head 3710. As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 3780 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3770 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 3770 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3782 to the club head 3710. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In the illustrative embodiments, the features 3770 are indentations into the wall 3783 positioned farthest from the trailing edge 3772. As illustrated in
The weights 3782 to be received by the features 3770 are similar to the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, and 3682 as described above. As illustrated in
The weights 3782 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weights 3782 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3782 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 3710 comprises multiple weights 3782, the weights 3782 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 3710 comprises three weights 3782 with the first weight 3782 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3782 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the club head 3710 comprises four weights 3782 with the first weight 3782 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3782 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3782 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3782 having a mass of 7 grams.
The weights 3782 can further comprise a groove 3771 positioned on a surface of the weights 3782 configured to receive a cable 3769. The groove 3771 is positioned on a surface of the weights 3782 opposite the surfaces of the weights 3782 abutting the features 3770. In some embodiments the groove 3771 has a C-shaped (or other shaped) contour, so as to facilitate retention of the cable 3769 along the top surface of the weight 3782. In other embodiments void of the groove 3771, the weights 3782 comprise a through aperture (not pictured) configured to receive the cable 3769.
The adjustable weighting system 3766 comprises the tensioner 3767 and the cable 3769. The tensioner 3767 is positioned in the recessed portion 3780 adjacent a heel or heel end 3722 of the club head 3710. Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 3767 can be positioned at other locations in the recessed portion 3780 along the club head 3710 such as the toe end 3718. The tensioner 3767 can be attached to the club head 3710 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 3767 is attached to the club head 3710, the tensioner 3767 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3710 when at address. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3767 can be flush with the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3730.
The cable 3769 of the adjustable weighting system 3766 is configures to be positioned within the recessed portion 3780. The cable 3769 comprises a first end and a second end. The first end of the cable 3769 is configured to be coupled to the tensioner 3767, while the second end of the cable 3769 is configure to be attached/fixed at an opposite end of the club head 3710 from the tensioner 3767. For example, in the illustrated embodiment with the tensioner 3767 positioned at the heel end 3722, the second end of the cable 3769 is attached/fixed at the toe end 3722 of the club head 3710. The cable 3769 can be similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, and 3669 as described above. The cable 3769 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 3769 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
The tensioner 3767 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, and 3667 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3767 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3767 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 3767 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3769. The cable 3769, in turn, is coupled to one or more of the weights 3782 (e.g., positioned along an external groove 3771 or within the aperture in the weights 3782). When the tensioner 3767 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3769 is tightened, and the cable 3769 presses on the weights 3782 creating a force against the features 3770 of the recessed portion 3780 to secure the weights 3782. When the weights 3782 abut against the features 3770, the weights 3782 are flush with the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3730. In other embodiments, when the weights 3782 abut against the features 3270, the weights 3782 can extend past the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3230, however, still do not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3710 when at address. In other embodiments still, when the weights 3782 abut against the features 3770, the weights 3782 do not extend to, or past the outer surface 3774 of the sole 3230. In other embodiments, the cable 3769 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3767.
The tensioner 3767 can be pressed downward (or pulled upward) to loosen the tension on the cable 3769. As the tension in the cable 3769 decreases, the weights 3782 are no longer pressed against the features 3770 of the recessed portion 3780. The weights 3782 can then be removed from the features 3770 and be repositioned by an end user to different features 3770 within the recessed portion 3780. In embodiments where the weights 3782 comprise an aperture instead of the groove 3771, the weights 3782 can be slid along the cable 3769 to reposition the weights 3782. Repositioning the weights 3782 reconfigures the CG of the club head 3710. For example in the illustrated embodiment, the weight 3782 can be repositioned from the first feature 3770A to the second feature 3770D near the heel end 3722, wherein the CG shift toward the heel end 3722 helps correct ball trajectory for players who tend to hook the ball. In other embodiments, the cable 3769 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3767.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3767 is in a naturally locked position, wherein the tensioner 3767 can be pressed downward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension of the cable 3769 on the weights 3782. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3769 is extended/loosened), the weights 3782 may then be repositioned into a different features 3770 along the club head 3710 to change the center of gravity. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3767 is in a naturally locked configuration, wherein the tensioner 3767 can be pulled upward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension of the cable 3769 on the weights 3782. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3767 and/or to release tension in the cable 3769.
The club head 3710 having the adjustable weighting system 3766 comprises a tensioner 3767 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3769 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3766 allows for the club head 3710 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 3710 having the tensioner 3767 and the cable 3769 adjustable weight system 3766 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3782 coupled to the club head body 3714 are secured by the tension of the cable 3769, which create a force on the weight(s) 3782 onto the feature(s) 3770 of the club head 3710. The tension produced force eliminates the need for the club head 3710 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3782. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension created force of the cable 3769 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3782 and the club head 3710 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3769 of the adjustable weighting system 3766 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on recessed portion 3780 of the club head 3710. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3782 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3830 because the weight(s) 3782 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3769 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3710. The material and pattern of the cable 3769 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3710 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3766 of golf club head 3710 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3766 of golf club head 3710 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 3710 having the adjustable weighting system 3766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 3866 is positioned within a recessed portion 3880 of the club head 3810. As illustrated in
In many embodiments, the channel 3813 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3870 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 3870 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3882 to the club head 3810. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In the illustrated embodiment, the features 3870 are protrusions extending from the recessed surface 3881 along the channel 3813 to secure weights 3882. The features 3870 comprises sidewalls and forms a prismatic shape. As illustrated in
The features 3870 can be spaced generally evenly apart from one another. In other embodiments, the features 3870 are spaced at any distance apart from one another. In some embodiments, the channel 3813 comprises three features 3870, wherein a first feature 3870 is positioned at the toe end 3818, a second feature 3870 is positioned at the heel end 3822, and a third feature 3870 is positioned at a general center between the first feature 3870A and the second feature 3870C, are all equidistant form one another. In another embodiment, the channel 3813 comprises three features 3870 wherein the first and third features 3870A and 3870B are positioned at the more near the toe end 3818, and the third feature 3870C is positioned in between the heel end 3822 and the general center of the trailing edge 3872.
The features 3870 are configured to receive weights 3882 similar to the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, and 3782 (shape, material, etc.). The different positions of the features 3870 in the channel 3813 allow for adjustment of the center of gravity based on the different positioning and distribution of the weights 3882. As illustrated in
The weights 3882 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weights 3882 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3882 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 3810 comprises multiple weights 3882, the weights 3882 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 3810 comprises three weights 3882 with the first weight 3882 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3882 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the club head 3810 comprises four weights 3882 with the first weight 3882 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3882 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3882 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3882 having a mass of 7 grams.
As stated above, the adjustable weighting system 3866 comprises the tensioner 3867 and the cable 3869 configured to be attached to the tensioner 3869. As illustrated in
The cable 3869 of the adjustable weighting system 3866 is configures to be received within the recessed portion. The cable 3869 comprises a first end and a second end, wherein the first end is configured to be coupled to the tensioner 3867, and the second end is attached/fixed at a location on the club head 3810 opposite the location of the tensioner 3867. For example in the illustrated embodiment, the tensioner 3867 is positioned on the heel end 3822 of the club head, the second end of the cable 3869 is attached/fixed to the toe end 3818 of the club head 3810. The cable 3869 can be similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3669, and 3769 as described above. The cable 3869 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 3869 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
The tensioner 3867 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, and 3767 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3867 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3867 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 3867 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3869. The cable 3869, in turn, is coupled to the weights 3882 (e.g., positioned along an external groove 3871, or the aperture in the weight or weights 3882, so as to press against the weights 3882). When the tensioner 3867 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3869 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 3869 presses on the weights 3882 and abuts the notch of the weights 3882 against the features 3870, securing the weights within the channel 3813. When the weights 3882 are secured, the weights 3882 are flush with the outer surface 3874 of the sole 3830. In other embodiments, the weights 3883 can extend past the outer surface 3874 of the sole 3830, but not past the lowest point of the sole 3830. In other embodiments still, the weights 3882 do not extend all the way to the outer surface 3874 of the sole 3830. In other embodiments, the cable 3869 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 3867.
The tensioner 3867 can be pressed (or pulled) to loosen the tension on the cable 3869. As the tension in the cable 3869 decreases, the features 3870 are no longer abutting against the notches of the weights 3882. The weights 3882 can then be removed from the features 3870 and be repositioned by an end user to different features 3870 within the channel 3813. In embodiments where the weights 3882 comprise an aperture instead of the groove 3871, the weights 3882 can be slid along the cable 3869 to reposition the weights 3882. Repositioning the weights 3782 reconfigures the center of gravity of the club head 3710. For example, when the weights 3782 are repositioned from the first feature 3870A positioned near the toe end 3818 to the second feature 3870C near the heel end 3822, the CG shift toward the heel end 3822 helps correct ball trajectory for a player who tends to hook the ball. In other embodiments, the cable 3869 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 3867.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3867 is in naturally locked position, wherein the tensioner 3867 can be pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release the tension in the cable 3869. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3869 is extended/loosened), the weights 3882 may then be repositioned (placed or slid) onto a different area along the club head 3810 (e.g., onto a different protruding feature 3870). In other embodiments, the tensioner 3867 is in a naturally locked configuration, wherein the tensioner 3867 can be pulled upward to engage rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release the tension in the cable 3869. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3867 and/or to release tension in the cable 3869.
The club head 3810 having the adjustable weighting system 3866 comprises the tensioner 3867 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3869 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3866 allows for the club head 3810 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 3810 having the tensioner 3867 and the cable 3869 adjustable weight system 3866 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3882 coupled to the features 3870 are secured by the tension of the cable 3869, which create a force on the notch of the a surface of the weight(s) and a surface of the club head. The tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s). Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension and friction created by the cable further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) and club head do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3869 of the adjustable weighting system 3866 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3874 of the club head 3810. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3882 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3830 because the weight(s) 3882 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3869 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3869 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3810. The material and pattern of the cable 3869 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3810 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3866 of golf club head 3810 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3866 of golf club head 3810 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 3810 having the adjustable weighting system 3866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 3966 is positioned on a sole 3930 of the club head 3910. As illustrated in
The channels 3913 comprise a recessed surface 3981, wherein the recessed surface 3981 is separated from the remaining outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930 by a wall 3984. The recessed surface 3981 of the channels 3913 comprise a groove (not shown), wherein the groove can comprise a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 3970 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 3970 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 3982 to the club head 3910. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The feature 3970 is a protrusion (e.g., a peg, a lip, a ledge, or any other protrusion configured to receive a hook-like formations on the weight 3982 of the adjustable weighting system 2966). The feature 3970 is positioned within the recessed surface 3981, adjacent the trailing edge 3972. In one embodiment, the feature 3970 extends within the groove toward the trailing edge 3972 (either parallel with the recessed surface 3981, or at an angle). In another embodiment, the feature 3970 extends within the groove toward the trailing edge 3972 and then bends downward toward the sole 3930 to create a hook-like protrusion as illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 3966 comprises the tensioner the 3967, the cable 3969, and the weight 3982. As illustrated in
The cable 3969 of the adjustable weighting system 3966 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, and 3869 as described above. The cable 3969 comprises a first end and a second end. The first end of the cable 3969 is configured to attach to the tensioner 3967. In some embodiments, the second end of the cable 3969 is configured to be coupled to the weight 3982, such that the weight 3982 is configured to couple to the feature 3970. In other embodiments as illustrated in
In some embodiments as illustrated in
The weight 3982 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 3982 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3982 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the cable 3969 can couple to multiple weights 3982, the weights 3982 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the cable 3969 is coupled to three weights 3982 with the first weight 3982 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 3982 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the couple is coupled to two weights 3982 with the first weight 3982 having a mass of 10 grams, and the second weight 3982 having a mass of 7 grams.
In some embodiments, when the weight 3982 is coupled to the feature 3970 (or the loop 3971 of the cable 3969 is coupled to the feature 3970), the weight 3982 is flush with the outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930. In other embodiments, the weight 3982 extend past the outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930, but does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 3910 at address to avoid obstructing a player's swing. In other embodiments still, the weight 3982 does not extend to the outer surface 3974 of the sole 3930 of the club head 3910.
The tensioner 3967 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, and 3867 as described above, wherein the tensioner 3967 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3967 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 3967 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 3969. The cable 3969, in turn, is coupled to one or more of the weights 3982 (e.g., the weights 3982 being permanently or removably fixed at the second end of the cable 3969). When receiving region 3983 of the weight 3982 is coupled to one of the features 3970, the tensioner 3967 is rotated clockwise, the cable 3969 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the weight are thus pulled firmly against the feature 3970 grooves of the channels 3913. The pull on the weight 3982 creates a force against the feature 3970 (or groove of the channel 3969), which prevents the weight 3982 from popping off the feature 3970. In the embodiment illustrated in
When the tensioner 3967 is pressed (or pulled) the tension is loosened on the cable 3969. As the tensioner in the cable decreases 3969, the receiving region 3983 of the weight (or the loop 3971 of the cable 3969) is no longer pressed against the feature 3970. The weight 3982 (or loop 3971) can then be removed from the feature 3970 and be repositioned to a different feature 3970 in a different channel 3913. The ability to reposition the cable 3969 and weight 3982 to a different channel 3913 allows for the center of gravity of the golf club head to shift about the heel to toe without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia similar to a golf club head without adjustable weighting. For example, when the cable 3969 and weight 3982 are positioned within the channel 3913A to shift the center of gravity toward the toe end 3918, wherein a CG toward the toe end 3918 will help center ball flight for players who tend to hook their shots.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 3967 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 3967 can be pressed to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to loosen tension in the cable 3969. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 3969 is extended), the weight 3982 may then be repositioned onto a different area along the club head 3910 (e.g., may be secured to a different feature 3970). During the repositioning of the weights 3982, the cable 3969 may be moved from one channel 3913 to a different channel 3913. In other embodiments, the tensioner 3967 is naturally in a locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 3967 can be pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release the tension of the cable 3969. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 3967 and/or to release tension in the cable 3969.
The club head 3910 having the adjustable weighting system 1966 comprises the tensioner 3967 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 3969 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 3966 allows for the club head 3910 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows for players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
The club head 3910 having the tensioner 3967 and the cable 3969 adjustable weight system 3966 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 3982 coupled to the club head body 3914 are secured by the tension of the cable, which create a abutment force on the weight(s) 3982 onto the feature 3970. The abutment force eliminates the need for the club head 3910 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 3982. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 3982 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The abutment force created by the cable 3969 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 3982 and club head 3910 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 3969 of the adjustable weighting system 3966 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 3913 in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 3974 of the club head 3910. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 3982 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 3930 because the weight(s) 3982 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 3969 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 3969 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 3910. The material and pattern of the cable 3969 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 3910 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 3966 of golf club head 3910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 3966 of golf club head 3910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 3910 having the adjustable weighting system 3966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4066 is positioned on a sole 4030 of the club head 4010. As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiments, the channels 4013 extend from the generally central positioned adjacent the trailing edge 4072 and extends into a recessed portion 4080 forming a circular recess. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 4080 can form any polygonal recess shape (e.g, triangular, square, trapezoidal, rectangular, pentagonal, hexagonal, etc.). The recessed portion 4080 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4070 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 4070 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 4082 to the club head 4010. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The feature 4070 is a protrusion extending from a general center of the recessed portion. In some embodiments, the feature 4070 is flush with an outer surface 4074 of the sole 4030. In other embodiments, the feature 4070 does not extend past the outer surface 4074 of the sole 4030. The recessed portion 4080 and feature 4070 are configured to receive a weight 4082 of the adjustable weighting system.
The adjustable weighting system 4066 comprises the tensioner 4067, the cable 4069, and the weight 4082. As illustrated in
The cable 4069 of the adjustable weighting system 4066 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, and 3969 as described above. The cable 4069 comprises a first end and a second end. The first end of the cable 4069 is configured to attach to the tensioner 4067, while the second end of the cable 4069 is configured to attach to the weight 4082. The cable 4069 is positioned within any of the channels 4010 to effect the weight distribution and CG of the club head 410. For example in the illustrated embodiment, the cable 4069 can be positioned in the third channel 4013B, wherein the third channel 4013B is located in the general center can give a player a neutral ball trajectory for player who typically is a straight shooter. The cable 4069 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 4069 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
In some embodiments as illustrated in
The weight 4082 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 4082 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 4082 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
The tensioner 4067 is similar to the tensioner 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, and 3967 as described above, wherein the tensioner 4067 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4067 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 4067 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4069. The cable 4069, in turn, are coupled to the weight 4082 (e.g., the weight 4082 being permanently or removably fixed at a distal end of the cable or cables 4069), and are disposed within channels 4013 that also form part of the recessed portion 4080. The aperture of the weight 4082 receives the feature 4070 within the recessed portion 4080, which prevents the weight 402 from shifting. When the tensioner 4067 is rotated clockwise, the cable 4069 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the weight is tightly latched onto the feature 4070 and is secured. In other embodiments, the cable 4069 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4067.
The tensioner 4067 can be pressed (or pulled) to loosen the tension on the cable 4069. As the tension in the cable 4069 decreases, the weight 4082 does not create a force onto the feature 4070 to secure the weight 4082. The weight 4082 can then be removed from the recessed portion 4080 and be repositioned by an end user onto different features 4070 of a different recessed portion 4080. In other embodiments, the cable 4069 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4067.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4067 is in a naturally locked positioned and can be pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension in the cable or cables. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 4069 is extended), the weights 4082 may then be repositioned into a different recessed portion 4080 (e.g., may be secured to a different protruding feature 4070). In other embodiments, the tensioner 4067 is naturally in a locked portion, wherein the tensioner 4067 can be pulled upward away from the club head 4010 to engage the rotational movement to release the tension in the cable 4069. In some embodiments, the channels 4013 and/or the features 4070 include an undercut to facilitate retention of the weights 4082. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4067 and/or to release tension in the cable 4069. In other embodiments, the cable 4069 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 4067.
The club head 4010 having the adjustable weighting system 4066 comprises the tensioner 4067 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4069 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 4066 allows for the club head 4010 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, and shifting the CG about the y-axis allows players to adjust the ball spin.
The club head 4010 having the tensioner 4067 and the cable 4069 adjustable weight system 4066 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight 4082 coupled to the club head body 4010 are secured by the tension of the cable 4069, which create a friction between a surface of the weight 4082 and a surface of the recessed portion 4080 and the feature 4070. The tension and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 4010 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight 4082. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4010 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension and friction created by the cable 4069 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight 4082 and club head 4010 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4069 of the adjustable weighting system 4066 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4013 in a number of different patterns on an outer surface 4074 of the club head 4010. The different patterns allows for the weight 4082 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4030 because the weight 4082 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight 4082 positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4069 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4069 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4010. The material and pattern of the cable 4069 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4010 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4066 of golf club head 4010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4066 of golf club head 4010 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the lightweight adjustable weighting system 4166, and the lack of a complex internal/external weight housing structure. The club head 4010 having the adjustable weighting system 4066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system is positioned on a sole 4130 of the club head 4110. As illustrated in
As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 4166 is comprises the tensioner 4167, the cable 4169, and the weight 4182. As illustrated in
The cable 4169 of the adjustable weighting system 4166 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, 3969, and 4069 as described above. The cable 4169 comprises a first end and a second end. The first end of the cable 4169 is configured to attach to the tensioner 4167, while the second end of the cable 4169 is configured to attach to the weight 4182. The cable 4169 can be positioned within any of the channels 4113 (e.g., the first channel 4115, the second channel 4116, the third channel 4117), and paired with the different positioning of the features 4170 to effect the weight distribution and CG of the club head 4110. For example in the illustrated embodiment, the cable 4169 can be positioned in the first channel 4115, wherein the first channel 4115 is located at the toe end 4118 can correct a player who tends to slice a ball. The cable 4169 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 4169 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc. In other embodiments, the channel 4169 is not coupled to the tensioner 4167 and can be loosen/retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4167.
In some embodiments as illustrated in
The weight 4182 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 4182 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 4182 can be 1 grams, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
The tensioner 4167 is similar to the tensioner 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, and 4067 as described above, wherein the tensioner 4167 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4167 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 4167 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4169. The cable 4169, in turn, is coupled to the weight 4182 (e.g., the weight 4182 being permanently or removably fixed at distal end of the cable 4169). When the tensioner 4167 is rotated, the cable 4169 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 4169 pulls the weight or weights 4182, to create a force firmly against the feature 4170 of the club head body 4010, thereby securing the weight 4182. In some embodiments, the channels 4113 and/or the features 4170 themselves include an undercut to facilitate retention of the weights 4182. In other embodiments, the channel 4169 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4167.
The tensioner 4167 can be pressed (or pulled) to loosen the tension on the cable 4169. As the tension in the cable 4069 decreases, the weight 4182 does not create a force onto the feature 4170 to secure the weight 4182. The weight 3882 can then be removed from the feature 4170 and be repositioned by an end user onto different features 4170 of the same channel 4113, or of different channels 4113. In other embodiments, the channel 4169 can be loosen by other means other than by the tensioner 4167.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4167 is in a naturally locked orientation and can be pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension in the cable 4169. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 4169 is extended), the weights 4182 may then be repositioned onto different positions on the sole 4130 (e.g., may be secured to a different notched feature 4170). In other embodiments, the tensioner 4167 is naturally in a locked portion, wherein the tensioner 4167 can be pulled upward to engage the rotational movement to release the tension in the cable 4169. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4167 and/or to release tension in the cable 4169.
The club head 4110 having the adjustable weighting system 4166 comprises the tensioner 4167 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4169 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 4166 allows for the club head 4110 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end), and about the y-axis (strikeface-to-rear) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory, while shifting the CG about the y-axis allows for players to control the spin imparted on a ball.
The club head 4110 having the tensioner 4167 and the cable 4169 adjustable weight system 4166 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 4182 coupled to the feature(s) 4170 are secured by the tension of the cable, which create a friction between a surface of the weight(s) 4182 and a surface of the club head, as well as an abutment force within the feature(s) 4170. The abutment and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 4110 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 4182. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 411 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The abutment force and friction created by the cable 4169 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 4182 and club head 4110 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4169 of the adjustable weighting system 4166 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4113 in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4174 of the club head 4110. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 4182 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4130 because the weight(s) 4182 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4169 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4169 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4110. The material and pattern of the cable 4169 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4166 of golf club head 4110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4166 of golf club head 4110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the adjustable weighting system 4166 being lightweight and lack of complex internal/external weight housing structures. The club head 4110 having the adjustable weighting system 4166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 4313 extends from near the toe end 4318 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 4322 following the contour of the trailing edge 4372 of the club head 4310. The channel 4313 is defined by a first surface 4373, a second surface 4374 disposed opposite the first surface 4373, and a third surface 4375 that extends between the first surface 4373 and the second surface 4374. In some embodiments, the first surface 4373 extends parallel to the second surface 4374, and perpendicular to the third surface 4375. The channel 4313 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 4379 that directly intersect the first surface 4373, the second surface 4374, and the third surface 4375. The additional end surfaces 4379 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 4383 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 4382 can be flush with an outer surface 4390 of the club head 4310. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 4310 aerodynamics.
The channel 4313 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 4310, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 4375. In some embodiments, the channel 4313 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 4318 to the heel end 4322. In the some embodiment, the channel 4313 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 4313 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 4318 to the heel end 4322. Thus, when a weight 4382 is coupled to the club head 4310 in one region of the channel 4313, the weight 4382 may fit flush in the channel 4313 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 4373, 4374. When the weight 4382 is coupled to the club head 4310 in a different region of the channel 4313, a portion of the weight 4382 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 4373, 4374. In some embodiments, the channel 4313 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 4334 where a portion of the weight 4382 protrudes beyond the first surface 4373 and/or the second surface 4374 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the channel 4313 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 4366 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 4313 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 4313 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 4313 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 4313 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 4373 and the second surface 4374. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 4313 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 4313 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
The feature 4370 is configured to receive a fastener 4385. The fastener 4385 can comprise threading to be secured into the feature 4370. In other embodiments, the fastener 4385 can be secured into the feature 4370 by press-fit, an adhesive, or by any other coupling means.
In the illustrated embodiments, the weights 4382 comprises a first portion 4383, and a second portion 4384. The weights 4382 can have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 4313. In other embodiments, the weights 4382 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 4313. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 4366 comprises one weight 4382. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 4366 can comprise more or less weights 4382 than the number of features 4370. For example, the adjustable weighting system 4366 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 4382. The weights 4382 can comprise an insertion aperture 4384 that extends entirely through the weight 4382. The insertion aperture 4384 is sized and shaped to receive a screw 4385. In some embodiments, the insertion aperture 4384 is threaded. To couple the weight 4382 to the club head 4310, at least a portion of the screw 4385 is passed through the insertion aperture 4384 in the weight 4382, and into one of the feature 4370. In some embodiments, the screw aperture 4371 has a diameter equivalent to a diameter of the insertion aperture 4384, although in other embodiments at least a portion of the insertion aperture 4384 may have a diameter larger than the diameter of the screw aperture 4371. In the illustrated embodiment, each screw aperture 4371 is threaded, such that the screw 4385 may be rotated and threaded in place into each of the feature 4370, and such that the weight 4382 may be held tightly in place within the channel 4313 after the screw 4385 has been rotated and threaded in place. In other embodiments, the weights 4382 can further be secured at the features 4370 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 4370 can receive the fastener 4385, wherein the fastener 4385 extends through (or abuts the weight 4382, or abuts the blind aperture) the weight 4382. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 4370 receives a weight 4382, while the remaining features 4370 are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 4370 receives more than one weight 4382.
With continued reference to
With continued reference to
While the embodiments described above utilize a screw 4385, screw apertures 4371, and insertion apertures 4384, yet other embodiments may utilize other structures to retain the weights 4382 within the channel 4313. For example, in some embodiments one or more clamps (not pictured) may be provided to releasably hold the weights 4382 within the channel 4313. In yet other embodiments, the weights 4382 themselves may be expanding weights, such that once the weights 4382 are placed within the channel 4313, the weights 4382 expand (e.g., naturally or with the aid of a tool) within the channel 4313, thereby creating a press fit within the channel 4313, securing the weights 4382 in place within the channel 4313.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 4382 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 4382 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 4382 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 4382 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 4382 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 4382 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 4382 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 4382 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 4382. In some embodiments, each of the weights 4382 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 4382 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 4382 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 4370. In some embodiments, the weights 4382 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 4382, one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 4382 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 4382 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 4382 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 4382 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 4382 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 4382 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 4382 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 4382 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 4382, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 4382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 4382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 4382 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 4382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 4382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 4382 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, the first weight 4382 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the second, third, and fourth weight 4382 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 4382 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 4382 may be strategically positioned and coupled to the features 4370 to achieve a desired club head 4310 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 4382 is positioned at the feature 4370B, located between the toe or toe end 4318 and the heel or heel end 4322, while lighter weights are positioned on the feature 4370A near the toe or toe end 4318 and the feature 4370C near the heel or heel end 4322. The fastener 4385 can be coupled to the feature 4370 and weight 4382 to secure the weight 4382 within the channel 4313 at the distinct location. The aforementioned weight 4382 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 4334 of the club head 4310. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 4382 is positioned on the feature 4370C near the heel or heel end 4322, while lighter weights 4382 are positioned on the feature 4370A near the toe or toe end 4318 and on the feature 4370B that is located between the toe or toe end 4318C and the heel or heel end 4322. The aforementioned weight 4382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 4322 of the club head 4310. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 4382 is positioned on the feature 4370A near the toe or toe end 4318, while lighter weights 4382 are positioned on the feature 4370C near the heel or heel end 4322 and on the feature 4370B that is located between the toe or toe end 4318 and the heel or heel end 4322. The aforementioned weight 4382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 4318 of the club head 4310. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 4370 are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 4370 can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 4370 has its own corresponding weight 4382 or set of weights 4382.
The adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4310 having the adjustable weighting system 4366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4366 of golf club head 4310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4310 having the adjustable weighting system 4366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4466 is positioned on a sole 4430 of the club head 4410. As illustrated in
The sole 4430 further comprises a recessed portion 4480. The recessed portion 4480 is positioned along the trailing edge 4472 of the sole 4430, interconnecting the channels 4413. The sole 4430 further still comprises a lip 4415. The lip 4415 is integrally formed with an outer surface 4474 of the sole 4430 and extends along the trailing edge 4472, parallel over the recessed portion 4480. The lip 4415 is separated from the remainder of the sole 4430 by a gap 4419. A trailing edge channel 4493 is formed between the recessed portion 4480 and the lip 4415.
The trailing edge channel 4493 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4470 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 4470 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 4482 to the club head 4410. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In the illustrated embodiments, the features 4470 is the junction of the channels 4413 intersecting the trailing edge channel 4493. In the illustrated embodiment, the club head comprises three features 4470, a first feature 4470A near the toe end 4418, a second feature 4470C near the heel end 4422, and a third feature 4470B in a general center between the first feature 4470A and the second feature 4470C. In other embodiment, the club head 4410 can comprise any number of features 4470, such as one feature 4470, two features 4470, three features 4470, four features 4470, five features 4470, six features 4470, seven features 4470, or eight features 4470. In many embodiments, there is the same number of features 4470 as there are number of channels 4413.
The feature 4470 of the club head 4410 is configured to receive a weight 4482. The locations of the feature 4470 along the trailing edge 4472 allows for the weight 4482 to adjust the CG about the x-axis. The weight 4482 comprises a top surface, and a bottom surface. The weight 4482 further comprises a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. In many embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weight 4482 is complimentary to a portion of the profile shape of the features 3270, wherein the top and bottom surfaces of the weight 4482 can touch the recessed portion and the lip when positioned within the feature 4470 and still be able to slide along within the feature. The weight 4482 has a width that is generally equivalent to a width of the channel 4413, such that the weight 4482 is prevented from rotating or twisting once it has been placed into the channel 4413.
The weight 4482 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 4482 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 4482 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
The adjustable weighting system 4466 comprises a tensioner 4467, and a cable 4469. As illustrated in
The cable 4469 of the adjustable weighting system is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, and 4169 as described above. The weight 4482 comprises a first end and a second end. The first end of the cable 4469 is configured to be attached to the tensioner 4467, while the second end of the cable 4469 is configure to be coupled to the weight 4482. The cable 4469 is coupled to the weight 4482 after the weight 4482 is placed within the feature 4470. The cable 4469 can be received within one of the channels 4413. As illustrated in
The tensioner 4467 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, 4067, and 4167, wherein the tensioner 4467 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4467 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 4467 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4469. The cable 4469, in turn, is coupled to the weight 4482 (e.g., the weight 4482 being permanently or removably fixed at the second end of the cable 4469). When the tensioner 4467 is rotated clockwise, the cable 4469 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 4469 pulls the weight 4482 creating a force on the weight 4482 firmly against the feature 4470 at the junction of the channels 4413 and the trailing edge channel 4493. Further a frictional force is created between the abutting surfaces of the weight 4482 and surfaces of the trailing edge channel 4493 at the feature 4470. The two forces created secures the weight 4482 within the feature 4470 and prevents the weight 4482 from sliding within the feature 4470. In some embodiments, the channel 4413 includes an undercut to facilitate retention and sliding of the weight 4482 within the channel 4413. In other embodiments, the cable 4469 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4467.
When the tensioner 4467 loosens the tension on the cable 4469, the two forces no longer act on the weight 4482. Without the two forces, the weight 4482 no longer abuts the recessed surface 4480 at the feature 4470. The cable 4469 can then be repositioned to a different channel 4413 by sliding the weight 4482 along the trailing edge channel 4493. As the weight 4482 slides along the trailing edge channel 4493, the cable 4469 goes along the gap 4419. The weight 4482 can then be repositioned to a different feature 4470 and the cable 4469 can be repositioned to an associated channel 4413. The ability to reposition the cable 4469 and weight 4482 to a different channel 4413 and feature 4470 allows for the center of gravity of the golf club head to shift about the x-axis (heel-to-toe). For example, when the cable 4469 are positioned within the first channel 4415 and the weight 4482 is positioned in the associated first feature 4470A to shift the center of gravity toward the toe end 4418, wherein a CG toward the toe end 4418 will help center ball flight for players who tend to slice their shots. In other embodiments, the cable 4469 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 4467.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4467 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4467 is pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension in the cable 4469 to hold the weight 4482 in place at a desired channel 4413. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 4469 is extended), the weight 4482 may then be repositioned into a different feature 4470 along the channel 4413. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4467 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner is pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release the tension in the cable 4469. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4467 and/or to release tension in the cable 4469.
The club head 4410 having the adjustable weighting system 4466 comprises the tensioner 4467 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4469 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 4466 allows for the club head 4410 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 4410 having the tensioner 4467 and the cable 4469 adjustable weight system 4466 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight 4482 coupled to the club head body 4414 are secured by the tension of the cable 4469 within the feature 4470, which create an abutment force and friction between surfaces of the weight 4482 and surfaces of the trailing edge channel 4493 at the feature 4470. The abutment and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 4410 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight 4482. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4410 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The abutment and friction force created by the cable 4469 and weight 4482 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight 4482 and club head 4410 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4469 of the adjustable weighting system 4466 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4413 in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4474 of the club head 4410. The different patterns allows for the weight 4482 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4430 because the weight 4482 is not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4469 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4469 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4410. The material and pattern of the cable 4460 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4410 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4466 of golf club head 4410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4466 of golf club head 4410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4410 having the adjustable weighting system 4466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4566 is positioned on a sole 4530 of the club head 4510. As illustrated in
The sole 4530 further comprises an elongated channel 4593 extending along the trailing edge 4572, wherein the channels 4513 integrally extend into the elongated channel 4593. The adjustable weighting system 4566 includes a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4570 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 4570 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 4582 to the club head 4510. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The junction of the elongated channel 4593 and the channels 4513 form the feature 4570. In the illustrated embodiment, the club head 4510 comprises three features 4570: a first feature 4570A at the junction of the elongated channel 4593 and the first channel 4515 near the toe end 4518, a second feature 4570C at the junction of the elongated channel 4593 and the second channel 4516 near the heel end 4522, and a third feature 4570B at the junction of the elongated channel 4593 and the third channel 4517 between the first feature 4570A, and the second feature 4570C. In other embodiments, the club head 4510 can comprise any number of features 4570, such as one feature 4570, two features 4570, three features 4570, four features 4570, five features 4570, six features 4570, seven features 4570, or eight features 4570.
The feature 4570 of the club head 4510 is configured to receive a weight 4582. The feature 4570 at several different distinct locations along the elongated channel 4593 allows for the weight 4582 to adjust the CG about the x-axis. The weight 4582 comprises a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. In many embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weight 4582 is complimentary to the cross-sectional shape of the feature 4570 at the junction of the elongated channel 4593 and the channels 4513, wherein a portion of the surfaces of the weight 4582 abut a portion of the surfaces of the feature 4570 when the weight 4582 is placed within the feature 4570.
The weight 4582 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 4582 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3782 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
The adjustable weighting system 4566 comprises a tensioner 4567 and a cable 4569. The tensioner 4567 is positioned in a general center on the sole 4530 of the club head 4510, disposed between the intersection of the radially extending channels 4513. Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 4567 can be positioned at other locations along the club head 4510 as long as the tensioner 4567 is disposed between the intersection of the radially extending channels 4513. The tensioner 4567 can be attached to the club head 4510 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 4567 is attached to the club head 4510, the tensioner 4467 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 4510 when at address. In the illustrated embodiments, the tensioner 4567 is flush with the outer surface 4574 of the sole 4530.
The cable 4569 of the adjustable weighting system 4510 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, and 4469 as described above. The weight 4582 comprises a first end and a second end. The first end of the cable 4569 is configured to be attached to the tensioner 4567, while the second end of the cable 4569 is configure to be coupled to the weight 4582. In other embodiments, the cable 4569 can extend and retract by other means other than the tensioner 4567. The cable 4569 can be received within one of the channels 4513. As illustrated in
The tensioner 4567 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, 4067, 4167, and 4467, wherein the tensioner 4567 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4567 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 4567 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4569. The cable 4569, in turn, is coupled to the weight 4582 (e.g., the weight 4582 being permanently or removably fixed at a distal end of the cable 4569). When the tensioner 4567 is rotated clockwise, the cable 4569 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 4569 pulls the weight 4582 creating a force on the weight 4582 firmly against the feature 4570 of the club head body 4510. Further, a frictional force is created between the abutting surfaces of the weight 4582 and of the feature 4570. The two forces created secures the weight 4582 within the feature 4570 and prevents the weight 4582 from sliding, shifting, or coming out within the feature 4570. In other embodiments, the cable 4569 can be retracted by other means other than by a tensioner.
When the tensioner 4567 loosens the tension on the cable 4569, the two forces no longer act on the weight 4582. Without the two forces, the weight 4582 does not abut the feature 4570. The weight 4582 can then be taken out of the feature 4570, and the cable 4569 can be repositioned to a different channel 4513, wherein the weight 4582 is repositioned to a corresponding feature 4570. The ability to reposition the cable 4569 and weight 4582 to a different channel 4513 and feature 4570 allows for the CG of the club head 4510 to shift about the heel end 4522, and toe end 4518. For example, when the cable 4569 and weight 4582 are repositioned from the third channel 4517 and third feature 4570B to the first channel 4515 and first feature 4570A, the CG shifts toward the toe end 4518, wherein a CG toward the toe end 4518 will help center ball flight for players who tend to slice their shots. In other embodiments, the channel 4569 can be loosen by other means other than by the tensioner 4567.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4567 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4567 is pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism in order to release tension in the cable 4569. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 4569 is extended), the weight 4582 may then be repositioned into a different feature 4570. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4567 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4567 is pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release the tension in the cable 4569. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4567 and/or to release tension in the cable 4569.
The club head 4510 having the adjustable weighting system 4566 comprises the tensioner 4567 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4569 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 4566 allows for the club head 4510 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 4510 having the tensioner 4567 and the cable 4569 adjustable weight system 4566 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight 4582 coupled to the feature 4570 are secured by the tension of the cable 4569, which create an abutment and friction force between a surface of the weight 4582 and surfaces of the feature 4570. The tension, abutment force and frictional force eliminates the need for the club head 4510 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s). Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4510 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension, abutment force, and friction created by the cable 4569 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight 4582 and club head 4510 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4569 of the adjustable weighting system 4566 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4513 in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4574 of the club head. The different patterns allows for the weight 4582 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4530 because the weight 4582 is not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4569 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4569 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4510. The material and pattern of the cable 4569 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4510 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4566 of golf club head 4510 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4566 of golf club head 4510 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4510 having the adjustable weighting system 4566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4666 is positioned on a sole 4630 of the club head 4610. As illustrated in
The sole 4630 further comprises an elongated channel 4617. The elongated channel 4617 is positioned along the trailing edge 4672, running from the toe end 4618 to the heel end 4622 in an arcuate fashion, wherein the channels 4613 integrally extend into the elongated channel 4617. The elongated channel 4617 is configured to receive the cable 4669. The elongated channel 4617 is shallow and lightweight compared to other club head channels having complex geometries, tracks, and deep weight housing.
The elongated channel 4617 of the club head 4610 is further configured to receive a weight 4682. The weight 4682 comprises a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. In many embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weight 4682 is complementary to a profile shape of the elongated channel 4617, wherein when the weight 4682 is placed within the elongated channel 4617, a portion of the surfaces of the weight 4682 abuts a portion of the surfaces of the elongated channel 4617. When the weight 4682 is positioned within the elongated channel 4617, the weight 4682 is able to slide along within the elongated channel 4617. As illustrated in
The weight 4682 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 4682 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 3782 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 4610 comprises multiple weights 4682, the weights 4682 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 4610 comprises three weights 4682 with the first weight 4682 having a mass of 5 grams, and both the second and third weights 4682 having a mass of 12 grams. In another example, the club head 4610 comprises four weights 4682 with the first weight 4682 having a mass of 7 grams, the second weight 4682 having a mass of 10 grams, the third weight 4682 having a mass of 15 grams, and the fourth weight 4682 having a mass of 20 grams.
The weight 4682 can further comprise a groove (not pictured). When the weight 4682 is portioned to within the elongated channel 4617, the groove is positioned on a surface of the weight 4682 adjacent the elongated channel 4617. The groove 4682 comprise a partial circle shape. In other embodiments, the weights 4682 is void of the groove and can comprise an aperture (not pictured) extending through a center of the weight 4682 instead. The groove 4671 or aperture are configured to receive the cable 4669 of the adjustable weighting system 4666.
The adjustable weighting system 4666 also comprises a tensioner 4667 and the cable 4669 coupled to the tensioner 4667 at both ends of the cable 4669. The tensioner 4667 is positioned in a general central location sole 4630 at a junction of the channels 4613 (i.e., junction of the first channel 4615 and the second channel 4616). Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 4667 can be positioned at other locations along the club head 4610 on the sole 4630, just as long as the tensioner 4667 is positioned at the junction of the channels 4613. The tensioner 4667 can be attached to the club head 4610 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 4667 is attached to the club head 4610, the tensioner 4667 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 4610 when at address. In the illustrated embodiment, the tensioner 4667 is flush with the outer surface 4674 of the sole 4630.
The cable 4669 of the adjustable weighting system 4666 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, 4469, and 4569 as described above. The cable 4669 is coupled to the tensioner 4667, received within the first channel 4615, received within the elongated channel 4617, and received within the second channel 4616 back to the tensioner 4667. In other embodiments, the cable 4669 can extend and retract by other means other than the tensioner 4667. The cable 4669 is configured to receive the groove (or aperture) of the weight 4682. The cable 4469 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 4669 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
The tensioner 4667 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, 4067, 4167, 4467, 4567, wherein the tensioner 4667 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4667 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 4667 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4669. The cable 4669, in turn, is coupled to the weight 4682 (e.g., to a groove along an exterior of the weight 4682, through an aperture within the weight 4682, or otherwise). When the tensioner 4667 is rotated clockwise, the cable 4669 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 4669 pulls the weight 4682 creating a force on the weight 4682 firmly against the elongated channel 4617 of the club head body 4610. Further, a frictional force is created between the abutting surfaces of the weight 4682 and surfaces of the elongated channel 4617. The two forces created secures the weight 4682 within the elongated channel 4617 and prevents the weight 4682 from sliding or shifting within the elongated channel 4617. In other embodiments, the cable 4669 can be retracted by other means other than by a tensioner.
When the tensioner 4667 loosens the tension on the cable 4669, the two forces no longer act on the weight 4682. Without the two forces, the weight 4682 does not abut the elongated channel 4617. Thus, in the embodiment of
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4667 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4667 is pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension in the cable 4669. When the tension is released (e.g., when the cable 4669 is extended), the weight 4682 may then be repositioned (slid) into a different position within the elongated channel 4617. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4567 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4667 is pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension in the cable 4669. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4667 and/or to release tension in the cable 4669.
The club head 4610 having the adjustable weighting system 4666 comprises the tensioner 4667 (or other cable adjustment means) and cable 4669 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 4666 allows for the club head 4610 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 4610 having the tensioner 4678 and the cable 4669 adjustable weight system 4666 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 4682 coupled to the elongated channel 4617 are secured by the tension of the cable, which create an abutment and friction forces between a surface of the weight(s) 4682 and surfaces of the elongated channel 4617. The tension, abutment and frictional forces eliminates the need for the club head 4610 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 4682. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4610 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension, abutment and friction forces created by the cable 4669 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 4682 and club head do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4669 of the adjustable weighting system 4666 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4613 in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4674 of the club head 4610. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 4682 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4630 because the weight(s) 4682 not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4669 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4669 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4610. The material and pattern of the cable 4669 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4610 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4669 of golf club head 4610 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4669 of golf club head 4610 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4610 having the adjustable weighting system 4669 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4766 is positioned on a sole 4730 of the club head 4710. As illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, the sole 3730 further comprises an elongated channel 4793 positioned along the trailing edge 4772 in an arcuate fashion, wherein the channels 4713 integrally extend into the elongated channel 4793. The elongated channel 4793 comprises a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. The adjustable weighting system 4766 includes a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4770 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 4770 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 4782 to the club head 4710. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The junction of the channels 4713 and the elongated channel 4793 form the feature 4770. The feature 4770 is configured to receive a weight 4782. As illustrated in
The weight 4782 comprises a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. In many embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weight 4782 is complimentary to a profile shape of the features 4770, wherein a portion of the surfaces of the weight 4782 abut a portion of the surfaces of the feature 4770 when the weight 4782 is placed within the feature 4770.
The weight 4782 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 4782 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 4782 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
In some embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 4766 comprises a tensioner 4767 and the cable 4769 coupled to the tensioner 4767 at one end of the cable 4769. The tensioner 4767 is positioned in a general center on the sole 4730 of the club head 4710, disposed at an intersection of the radially extending channels 4713. Although in other embodiments, the tensioner 4767 is positioned at other locations on the sole 4730 of the club head 4710, still disposed at an intersection of the radially extending channels 4713. The tensioner 4767 can be attached to the club head 4710 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 4767 is attached to the club head 4710, the tensioner 4767 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 4710 when at address. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4767 is flush with the outer surface 4774 of the sole 4730.
The cable 4769 of the adjustable weighting system 4766 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, 4469, 4569, 4669 as described above. The cable 3769 comprises a first end and a second end. In some embodiments, the first end of the cable 4769 is configured to be attached to the tensioner 4767, while the second end of the cable 4769 is configure to be coupled to the weight 4782. In other embodiments, the cable 7 can extend and retract by other means other than the tensioner 4767. The cable 4769 can be received within one of the channels 4713. As illustrated in
The tensioner 4567 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, 4067, 4167, and 4467, wherein the tensioner 4567 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4767 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. The tensioner 4767 may be rotated (e.g., twisted) in increments to adjust a tension in the cable 4769. The cable 4769, in turn, is coupled to the weight 4782 with a turnbuckle 4783, which allows the weight 4782 to be rotated when not placed in the channel 4713. When the tensioner 4667 is rotated clockwise, the cable 4769 is tightened (e.g., retracted), and the cable 4769 pulls the weight 4782 creating a force on the weight 4782 firmly against the feature 4770. Further, a frictional force is created between the abutting surfaces of the weight 4782 and of the feature 4770. The two forces created secures the weight 4782 within the feature 4770. In other embodiments, the cable 4769 can be retracted by other means other than by a tensioner. When the tensioner 4767 loosens the tension on the cable 4769, the two forces no longer act on the weight 4782. Without the two forces, the weight 4782 does not abut the feature 4770. The weight 4782 can then be taken out of the feature 4770, and the cable 4769 can be repositioned to a different channel 4713. In other embodiments, the cable 4769 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4767.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4767 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4767 is pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension in the cable 4769. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4767 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4767 is pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension in the cable 4769. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4767 and/or to release tension in the cable 4769. In other embodiments, the cable 4769 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 4767.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4767 is not provided. Rather, the first end of the cable 4769 is fixed or otherwise anchored directly to the club head 4710 at the intersection of the radially extending channels 4713, and the second end of the cable 4769 is coupled to the turnbuckle 4783. The weight 4782 in turn is coupled to the turnbuckle 4782. Tension in the cable 4769 may be achieved by adjusting the turnbuckle 4783 itself (i.e., rotating one or both ends 4784 of the turnbuckle to shorten the overall length of the turnbuckle 4783 to pull the cable 4769). The tension created by the turnbuckle 4783 is sufficient to hold the weight 4782 against the feature 4770 of the club head body 4714. In some embodiments, one end 4784 of the turnbuckle 4783 is coupled (e.g., directly) to a central location on the sole or bottom 4730 of the club head body 4714 (or other location on the club head body 4714). One end of the cable 4769 is coupled to the turnbuckle 4783, and an opposite end of the cable 4769 is coupled to the weight 4782, such that the cable 4769 extends between the turnbuckle 4783 and the weight 4782. Other embodiments include different numbers and locations of turnbuckles than that illustrated.
The turnbuckle 4783 can be rotated in an opposite direction to lengthen the turnbuckle 4783 and release the tension in the cable 4769. When the cable 4770 is loose, the weight 4782 can be repositioned to a different location within the feature 4770 corresponding with a channel 4713. For example, the weight 4782 can initially be positioned within the third feature 4770B with the cable positioned in the third channel 4717. When the turnbuckle 4783 is rotated to loosen the cable 4769, the weight 4882 can be repositioned in the second feature 4770C and the cable 4769 is positioned within the corresponding second channel 4716. The turnbuckle 4783 can then be rotated to increase the tension in the cable 4769 to secure the weight 4782 in place. Repositioning the weight 4782 from a general center position to near the heel end 4722 can help correct ball trajectory for a player who tends to hook the ball.
The club head 4710 having the adjustable weighting system comprises the tensioner 4767 (or other cable adjustment means such as a turnbuckle 4783) and cable 4769 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club 4710. The adjustable weighting system 4766 allows for the club head 4710 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 4710 having the tensioner 4767 (or turnbuckle 4783) and the cable 4769 adjustable weight system 4766 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight 4782 coupled to the feature 4770 are secured by the tension of the cable 4769, which create an abutment force and friction force between a surface of the weight 4782 and a surface of the club head 4710. The tension, abutment and frictional forces eliminates the need for the club head 4710 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight 4782. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4710 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension and friction created by the cable further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight 4782 and club head 4710 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4769 of the adjustable weighting system 4766 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the channels 4713 in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4774 of the club head 4710. The different patterns allows for the weight 4782 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole because the weight 4782 is not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4769 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4769 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4710. The material and pattern of the cable 4769 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4769 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4766 of golf club head 4710 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4766 of golf club head 4710 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4710 having the adjustable weighting system 4766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4866 is positioned on a sole 4830 of the club head 4810. As illustrated in
The sole 4830 further comprise slots 4893. The slots 4893 are positioned on the lip of the outer surface 4874 above the elongated channel 4813, and extends toward a general center of the sole 4830. In the illustrated embodiment, the club head 4810 comprises three slots 4893, a first slot 4894 near the toe end 4818, a second slot 4895 near the heel end 4822, and centrally located third slot 4896 in between the first and the second slot 4894, and 4895. In other embodiments, the club head 4810 can comprise any number of slots 4893, such as one slot 4893, two slots 4893, three slots 4893, four slots 4893, five slots 4893, six slots 4893, seven slots 4893, or eight slots 4893. The slots 4893 are configure to receive a cable of the adjustable weight system 4866 and are retention guides for the cable 4869. Thus, each of the slots 4893 is sized and shaped to contact and/or otherwise guide and retain the cable 4869. In some embodiments, the slots 4893 have a C-shaped or other shaped profile to facilitate retention of the cable 4869. Other embodiments include different shapes and sizes of the slots 4893.
The sole further comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 4870 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 4870 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 4882 to the club head 4810. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The features 4870 formed at the junction of the elongated channel 4813 and the slots 4893. In the illustrated embodiment, the club head 4810 comprises three features 4870, a first feature 4870A near the toe end 4818 at the junction of the elongated channel 4813 and the first slot 4894, a second feature 4870C near the heel end 4822 at the junction of the elongated channel 4813 and the second slot 4895, and centrally located third feature 4870 in at the junction of the elongated channel 4813 and the second slot 4896 between the first and the second features 4870A, and 4870C. In other embodiments, the club head 4810 can comprise any number of features 4870, such as one feature 4870, two features 4870, three features 4870, four features 4870, five features 4870, six features 4870, seven features 4870, or eight features 4870. In many embodiments, the number of features 4870 is the same number as slots 4793. The features 4870 is configured to receive a weight 4882.
The sole 4830 further comprises a recess 4871 located in a general center of the sole 4830. The recess 4871 forms a central lip with the outer surface 4874 of the sole 4830. In the illustrated embodiments the central lip of the recess 4871 has three generally linear portions 4875 angled relative to one another at oblique angles, although other embodiments include different profiles than that illustrated (e.g., curved, etc.), as well as different locations for a lip structure 4871 than that illustrated. The central lip of the recess 4871 is configured to receive a clip 4890 of the adjustable weighting system 4866.
The weight 4882 comprises a general cross-sectional shape such as a cylinder, a triangular prism, a cube, a rectangular prism, a pentagonal prism, a hexagonal prism, or etc. In many embodiments, the cross-sectional shape of the weight 4882 is complimentary to a cross-sectional shape of the features 4870, wherein a portion of the surfaces of the weight 4882 abut surfaces of the feature 4870 when the weight 4882 is placed within the feature 4870. Further, the weight 4882 comprise a width greater than a width of the slots 4893, wherein the weight 4882 cannot pass through the slots 4893.
The weight 4882 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weight 4882 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 4882 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams.
The adjustable weighting system 4866 comprises the clip 4890 configured to receive the central lip of the recess 4871. As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 4866 also comprises a cable 4869 coupled to the weight 4882 at one end of the cable 4869, and to the clip 4890 at an opposite end of the cable 4869. The cable 4869 is a sponge cord, although other embodiments include different types of cables 4869. The cable 4869 passes through the slot 4893 and engages the weight 4882 within the feature 4870. The cable 4869 can be made of a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 4869 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
To adjust the weight 4882, the clip 4890 is moved along or removed entirely from the central lip of the recess 4871 (e.g. by stretching the sponge cord). The tension of the cable 4869 secures the weight 4882 and the clip 4890 in place. In some embodiments a tool is used to remove the clip 4890 from the central lip of the recess 4871. The weight 4882 is moved along or removed entirely from the feature 4870. The weight 4882 and clip 4890 are then repositioned as desired. For example, the weight 4882 is moved to a different location feature 4870 along the elongate channel 4813, the clip 4890 is moved to a different location along the central lip of the recess 4871, and the cable 4869 is positioned within a different slot 4893. The weight 4882 can be repositioned so that the cable 4869 is repositioned from the first feature 4870A to the second feature 4870C, wherein the CG shifts toward the heel end 4822 to correct the ball trajectory of a player who tends to hook the ball.
The club head 4810 having the adjustable weighting system 4866 comprises the tensioner 4867 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4869 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 4866 allows for the club head 4810 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows for players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 4810 having the tensioner 4867 and the cable 4869 adjustable weight system 4866 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight 4882 coupled to the feature 3870 are secured by the tension of the cable 4869, which create an abutment force and friction force between a surface of the weight 4882 and surfaces of the feature 4870. The tension, abutment and frictional forces eliminates the need for the club head 4810 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight 4882. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4810 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension, abutment, and friction forces created by the cable 4869 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight 4882 and club head 4810 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4869 of the adjustable weighting system 4866 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated with the slots 4893 in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4874 of the club head 4810. The different patterns allows for the weight 4882 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 4830 because the weight 4882 is not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4869 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4869 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4810. The material and pattern of the cable 4869 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4810 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4866 of golf club head 4810 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4866 of golf club head 4810 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4810 having the adjustable weighting system 4866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 4966 is positioned on a sole 4930 of the club head 4910. With reference to
In some embodiments one or more of the weights 4982 has a generally curved profile, to match a curvature of the bottom or sole 4930. As illustrated in
The weights 4982 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weights 4982 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 4982 can be 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 4910 comprises multiple weights 4982, the weights 4982 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 4910 comprises three weights 4982 with the first weight 4982 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 4982 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the club head 4910 comprises four weights 3282 with the first weight 3282 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 3282 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 3282 having a mass of 10 grams, and the fourth weight 3282 having a mass of 7 grams.
The adjustable weighting system 4966 comprises a tensioner 4967 and a cable 4969. The tensioner 4967 is located at the heel end 4922 of the club head 4910, although in other embodiments the tensioner 4967 is located at a different location on the club head 4910 such as the toe end 4918. The tensioner 4967 can be attached to the club head 4910 by way of fastener or by an adhesive. When the tensioner 4967 is attached to the club head 4910, the tensioner 4967 does not extend past the lowest point of the club head 4910 when at address.
The cable 4969 of the adjustable weighting system 4966 is similar to the cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, 4469, 4569, 4769, and 4869 as described above. The cable 4969 comprises a first end and a second end. The first end of the cable 4969 is configured to be attached to the tensioner 4967, while the second end is configured to be attached/fixed to the club head 4910 on the sole 4930 at the opposite end of the tensioner 4967. In other words, in embodiment with the tensioner 4967 positioned on the heel end 4922, the second end of the cable 4969 is fixed at the toe end 4918. Similarly, in embodiments with the tensioner 4967 positioned on the toe end 4918, the second end of the cable 4969 is fixed at the heel end 4922). In other embodiments, the cable 4969 can retract and extend by other means other than the tensioner 4967. The cable 4969 are configured to be received within the through apertures 4987 of grooves of the cable guides 4985. The cable 4969 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 4969 can be made of baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating or etc.
The tensioner 4967 is similar to the tensioners 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, 4067, 4167, and 4467, wherein the tensioner 4567 acts as a winch and ratchet mechanism to adjusts tension in the cable 4969 similar to the embodiments described above. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4967 can be a J-slot tensioner similar to J-slot tensioner 3267 as described above. When the tensioner 4967 is rotated clockwise, the tension created in the cable 4969 presses up against the groove 4983 (or aperture) of the weights 4982 to create a force on the weights 4982 against the sole 4930 of the club head body 4914. Further, a frictional force is created between the dampener of the weights 4982 and the outer surface 4974 (or feature) of the sole 4930. The two forces created secures the weight 4982 onto the outer surface 5974 of the sole 4930 and prevents the weight 4982 from sliding or shifting. In other embodiments, the cable 4969 can be retracted by other means other than by the tensioner 4967.
When the tensioner 4967 loosens the tension on the cable 4969, the two forces no longer act on the weight 4982. Without the two forces, the weight 4982 does not abut the outer surface 4974 (or feature) of the sole 4930. The weight 4982 can then decouple from the cable 4969 (or slide) and be repositioned to a different positioned along the cable 4969. The ability to reposition the weight 4582 along the cable 4969 allows for the CG of the club head 4910 to shift about the heel end 4922, and toe end 4918. For example, when the weight 4982 is repositioned from a location on the cable 4969 in general center between the toe end 4918 and the heel end 4922 to a location on the cable 4969 near the toe end, the CG shifts toward the toe end 4918. A CG shift toward the toe end 4918 will help center ball flight for players who tend to slice their shots.
In some embodiments, the tensioner 4967 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4967 is pressed downward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension in the cable 4969. In other embodiments, the tensioner 4967 is in a naturally locked orientation, wherein the tensioner 4967 is pulled upward to engage the rotational movement of the winch and ratchet mechanism to release tension in the cable 4869. In some embodiments, a tool is required to rotate the tensioner 4967 and/or to release tension in the cable 4969.
The club head 4910 having the adjustable weighting system 4966 comprises the tensioner 4967 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 4969 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 4966 allows for the club head 4910 to adjust the already low and back center of gravity about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a relatively high moment of inertia (MOI) similar to that of a club head void of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 4910 having the tensioner 4967 and the cable 4969 adjustable weight system 4966 further have an utility regarding ease of manufacturing compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (i.e., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 4982 coupled to the club head body 4914 are secured by the tension of the cable 4969, which create an abutment and frictional forces between a surface of the weight(s) 4982 (or friction pad) and the outer surface 4974 of the club head 4910. The tension, abutment and frictional forces eliminates the need for the club head 4910 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 4982. Thereby reducing the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure. The mass saved from the lack of the weight housing structure can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head 4910 to increase strength and/or mass in that location. The tension, abutment, and frictional forces created by the cable 4969 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 4982 and club head 4910 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and increase production.
Further, the cable 4969 of the adjustable weighting system 4966 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on the outer surface 4974 of the club head 4910. The different patterns allows for the weight(s) 4982 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole because the weight(s) 4982 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the center of gravity placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 4969 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable 4969 can reinforce specific locations on the club head 4910. The material and pattern of the cable 4969 can further still act as a sound dampener and absorb vibration experienced by the club head 4910 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 4966 of golf club head 4910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 4966 of golf club head 4910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 4910 having the adjustable weighting system 4966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 5066 is positioned on a sole 5030 of the club head 5010. The adjustable weighting system 5066 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 5070 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 5070 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 5082 to the club head 5010. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In the illustrated embodiment, the feature 5070 is a three-dimensional geometric pattern along the sole 5030 of the club head body 5014 adjacent a trailing edge 5072 creating a U-shaped strip. However, the feature 5070 can be of any shape and any configuration such that one or more weights may be coupled to (to include being pressed against) the features 5070. In other embodiments, the geometric pattern feature 5070 can extends to other areas of the sole 5030, or to other areas of the club head body 5014 (e.g., covering substantially all or all of the sole or bottom 5030), and can form any shape (e.g., partial circle, straight strip, zig-zag, W-shaped, V-shaped, etc.). In some embodiments, the feature 5070 extends the entire trailing edge 5072 extending from a toe end 5018 to a heel end 5022, while is other embodiments, the feature 5070 extends only a portion of the trailing edge 5070.
As illustrated in
The feature 5070 of the adjustable weighting system 5066 is configured to receive a weight 5082 of the adjustable weighting system 5066. The weights 5082 are configured for distinct locations of the recesses 5073 of the features 5070. The weight 5082 comprises a diamond-like shape. In many embodiments, the weight 5082 can comprise a shape complimentary to the recesses 5073 of the feature 5070. The weight 5082 can be in any of the recesses 5073 of the feature 5073. In some embodiments, the club head 5010 can comprise one weight 5082. In other embodiments, the club head 5010 can comprise more than one weight 5082, such as two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, or ten weights 5082. In other embodiments still, the club head can comprise more than ten weights 5082, such as 12, 15, 18, 20, 23, 25, 28, or 30 weights 5082.
As illustrated in
The cover 5074 comprises an outer surface 5073, and an inner surface (not pictured). The outer surface 5073 of the cover 5074 can comprise a smooth surface and is flush with the outer surface 5074 of the sole 5030 when the weight 5082 is received by the feature 5070. The inner surface of the cover 5074 is configured to be adjacent to the feature 5070 and the weights 5082.
In some embodiments the weight 5082 is restrained from shifting by the surfaces of the three-sided pyramids 5071 or other surfaces of the geometric pattern feature 5070. In some embodiments, the weights 5082 are at least partially restrained by fasteners, clips, cables, or other structures. As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 5066 of golf club head 5010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5066 of golf club head 5010 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5010 having the adjustable weighting system 5066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 5113 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 5110, and/or along a direction that is normal to the recessed surface 5181 of the channel 5113. In the illustrated embodiment, the channel 5113 has a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 5113 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 5118 to the heel end 5122. Thus, when a weight 5182 is coupled to the club head 5110 in one region of the channel 5113, the weight 5182 may fit flush in the channel 5113 and/or be concealed by wall 5183 of the channel 5113.
In many embodiments, the channel 5113 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 5166 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 5113 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 5113 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 5113 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 5113 includes a width. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 5113 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 5113 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
The weight 5182 of the adjustable weighting system 5166 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 5113. In other embodiments, the weight 5182 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 5113. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 5166 comprises one weight 5182 configured to be coupled to the three features 5170A, B, C. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 5166 can comprise more or less weights 5182 than the number of features 5170A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 5166 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten weights 6382.
As illustrated in
As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 5166 of golf club head 5110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5166 of golf club head 5110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5110 having the adjustable weighting system 5166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
The adjustable weighting system 5266 comprises a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 5270 including protruding bodies, apertures or recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 5270 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 5282 to the club head 5210. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. The feature 5270 is positioned along a sole or bottom 5230 of the club head body 5214, adjacent a trailing edge 5272 and defining a recessed portion or aperture. The feature (recessed portion) 5270 is along the trailing edge 5272 and extends into a general center portion of the sole 5230, forming a general seashell-like shape. In other embodiments, the feature 5270 can extend into any portion of the sole 5230 and form any shape (e.g., partial circle, partial ellipse, circle, square, triangular, etc.). As illustrated in
The sole plates 5273 of the adjustable weighting system 5266 is configured to be received within the feature 5270. In the illustrated embodiment, the sole plate 5273 is positioned over the feature 5270 of the club head 5210. In other embodiments, the sole plate 5273 may be positioned over any other portion of the club head 5210, including a crown, toe, heel, etc. In some embodiments, more than one sole plate 5273 may be positioned on any combination of the above described regions of the club head 5210. In some embodiments, the cut-out region 5271 and/or the recessed portion or aperture 5280 are not present. Rather, the sole plates 5273 are coupled directly over an exterior surface of the club head body 5214 (e.g., along the sole or bottom 5230). In some embodiments, the club head body 5214 includes designated areas including shallow recessed portions, notches, or other designated areas that are sized and shaped to receive the sole plates 5273, such that when a sole plate 5273 is coupled to the designated area, at least a portion of the sole plate 5273 is generally flush with a remainder of the surrounding club head body 5214.
The sole plates 5273 can comprise a general shape and contour. In the illustrated embodiment, the sole plates comprise a seashell-like shape and contour to fit onto the sole 5230 of the club head 5210. In other embodiments, the sole plates can comprise any other general shape and contour such as a partial circle, partial ellipse, circle, square, triangular, pentagon, trapezoid etc. In many embodiments, the sole plates 5273 comprise a general shape and contour complimentary to the feature 5270 (recessed portion) of the club head 5210. In some embodiments the sole plates 5273 are of different size, shape, and/or material depending on the feature 5270. In some embodiments, one or more of the sole plates 5273 is formed of a plastic material. In other embodiments, sole plates 5273 are formed of other materials, such as composite, carbon fiber, metal, or a combination of the above described materials.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the sole plates 5273 comprises a recessed region 5274, and a recess 5275 (
As illustrated in
The sole plates 5273 may be coupled to the club head body 5214 in a variety of manners. For example, the sole plates 5273 may be coupled to the club head body 5214 via a frictional fit, lap joint, adhesive, fasteners, and/or snap-fit, or any other attachment means. As illustrated in
As illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 5366 includes a plurality of distinct attachment location. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 5370. In some embodiments, the features 5370 can be protruding bodies, apertures, recesses, ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches, tabs, cutout regions, ribs, grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 5370 define a discrete attachment location for securing the weight 5382 to the club head 5310. In contrast to other adjustable weighting systems wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the recessed portion. In the illustrated embodiment, the features 5370 are shallow ports that have a threading. The features 5370 may be of any shape and any configuration such that one or more weights 5382 may be coupled to (to include being pressed against) the features 5370. The weights 5382 can be coupled, and decoupled to the feature 5370 by a tool.
In the illustrated embodiment, the features 5370 are positioned on a sole or bottom 5330 of the club head body 5314, adjacent a trailing edge 5372 that defines a perimeter of the club head 5310 extending between a crown and the sole 5330. As illustrated in
As illustrated in
The weights 5382 comprises a material which comprise a mass. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 5382 can comprise materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5382 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 5382 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 5382 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5382 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 5382. In some embodiments, each of the weights 5382 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 5382 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 5382 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 5370A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 5382 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 5382, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 5382 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 5382 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 5382 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 5382 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5382 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 5382 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 5382 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 5382 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 5382 may vary between 10-20 g, 10-25 g, 15-20 g or 15-25 g, and a second and third weight 5382 may vary between 0.25-10 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 5382 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 5382, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5382 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 5382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5382 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5382 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams, and the second, third, and fourth weight 5382 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5382 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
In one embodiment, a first weight 5382 is positioned in the first feature 5370A, a second weight 5382 is in positioned in the second feature 5370C, and a third weight 5382 is position in third feature 5370B. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5382 are positioned anywhere along the club head body 5314 (e.g., along the perimeter). For in other embodiments, a first weight 5382 can be positioned in a feature 5370 in between the toe end 5318 and a rear 5323 at the trailing edge 5372 and a second weight 5382 can be positioned in a feature 5370 in between the rear 5323 and the heel end 5322 at the trailing edge 5372.
In the illustrated embodiment, all of the weights 5382 are positioned at a minimum distance 5399 from a center of gravity (CG) of the club head body 5314. The minimum distance of the weights 5382 from the CG of the club head body 5314 can range from approximately 1.0 inches to 2.6 inches (e.g. approximately 1.0 inches, approximately 1.2 inches, approximately 1.4 inches, approximately 1.6 inches, approximately 1.8 inches, approximately 2.0 inches, approximately 2.2 inches, approximately 2.4 inches, or approximately 2.6 inches). Other embodiments include different values and ranges.
From a side view of the golf club head 5310, as illustrated in
The adjustable weights 5382 allow for a player to manipulate the ball flight (e.g. back spin and side spin, correcting a slice or hook) by adjusting the positioning of the club head weights 5382. The positioning of the adjustable weights 5382 in the shallow feature 5370 positioned along the perimeter allows for the golf club head 5310 to maintain a high moment of inertia (MOI). The user is able to adjust ball flight while maintaining a high MOI. The high MOI will prevent rotation of the club head 5310 when swinging, resulting in a higher forgiveness and straighter hits. In one example, the weight 5382 can be repositioned from the first feature 5370A to the second feature 5370C, wherein the weight 5370 shifts the CG toward the heel end 5322 to correct ball trajectory for players who tend to hook the ball.
The adjustable weighting system 5366 of golf club head 5310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5366 of golf club head 5310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5310 having the adjustable weighting system 5366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 5413 extends from near the toe end 5418 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 5422 following the contour of the trailing edge 5472 of the club head 5410. The channel 5413 is defined by a first surface 5473, a second surface 5474 disposed opposite the first surface 5473, and a third surface 5475 that extends between the first surface 5473 and the second surface 5474. In some embodiments, the first surface 5473 extends parallel to the second surface 5474, and perpendicular to the third surface 5475. The channel 5413 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 5479 that directly intersect the first surface 5473, the second surface 5474, and the third surface 5475. The additional end surfaces 5479 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 5483 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 5482 can be flush with an outer surface 5490 of the club head 5410. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 5410 aerodynamics.
The channel 5413 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 5410, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 5475. In some embodiments, the channel 5413 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 5418 to the heel end 5422. In the some embodiment, the channel 5413 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 5413 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 5418 to the heel end 5422. Thus, when a weight 5482 is coupled to the club head 5410 in one region of the channel 5413, the weight 5482 may fit flush in the channel 5413 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 5473, 5474. When the weight 5482 is coupled to the club head 5410 in a different region of the channel 5413, a portion of the weight 5482 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 5473, 5474. In some embodiments, the channel 5413 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 5434 where a portion of the weight 5482 protrudes beyond the first surface 5473 and/or the second surface 5474 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the channel 5413 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 5466 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 5413 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 5413 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 5413 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 5413 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 5473 and the second surface 5474. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 5413 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 5413 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
The weights 5482 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 5413. In other embodiments, the weights 5482 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 5413. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 5466 comprises one weight 5482. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 5466 can comprise more or less weights 5482 than the number of features 5470A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 5466 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 5482. In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 5482 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 5482 sized and configured to receive the threaded fastener 5476. The threaded fastener 5476 can be threaded through the weight 5482 into the corresponding feature 5470, thus securing the weight 5482 to the channel 5413. In some embodiments, the weight 5482 can comprise a filet for receiving the top portion of the screw and therefore the screw can sit flush with the outer portion of the weight 5482. In other embodiments, the weight 5482 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 5482. In other embodiments, the weight 5482 can be devoid of an aperture. In other embodiments, the weights 5482 can further be secured the features 5470 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 5470A, B, C can receives the threaded fastener 5476 extended through the weight 5482. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 5470A, B, C receives a weight 5482, while the remaining features 5470A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5470A, B, C receives more than one weight 5482.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 5482 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 5482 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 5482 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 5482 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5482 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 5482 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 5482 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5482 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 5482. In some embodiments, each of the weights 5482 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 5482 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 5482 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 5470A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 5482 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 5482, one or more of the weights 5482 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 5482 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 5482 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 5482 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 5482 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5482 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 5482 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 5482 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 5482 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 5482 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 5482 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 5482 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 5482, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5482 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 5482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5482 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5482 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams, and the second, third, and fourth weight 5482 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5482 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 5482 may be strategically positioned on the features 5470A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 5410 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 5482 is positioned on the feature 5470B, located between the toe or toe end 5418 and the heel or heel end 5422, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 5470A, C near the toe or toe end 5418 and the heel or heel end 5422. The aforementioned weight 5482 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 5434 of the club head 5410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5482 is positioned on the features 5470C near the heel or heel end 5422, while lighter weights 5482 are positioned on the feature 5470A near the toe or toe end 5418 and on the feature 5470B that is located between the toe or toe end 5418 and the heel or heel end 5422. The aforementioned weight 5482 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 5422 of the club head 5410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5482 is positioned on the feature 5470A near the toe or toe end 5418, while lighter weights 5482 are positioned on the feature 5470C near the heel or heel end 5422 and on the feature 5470B that is located between the toe or toe end 5418 and the heel or heel end 5422. The aforementioned weight 5482 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 5418 of the club head 5410. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 5470A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 5470A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5470A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 5470A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 5482 or set of weights 5482.
With continued reference to
The adjustable weighting system 5466 of golf club head 5410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5466 of golf club head 5410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5410 having the adjustable weighting system 5466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 5513 extends from near the toe end 5518 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 5522 following the contour of the trailing edge 5572 of the club head 5510. The channel 5513 is defined by a first surface 5573, a second surface 5574 disposed opposite the first surface 5573, and a third surface 5575 that extends between the first surface 5573 and the second surface 5574. In some embodiments, the first surface 5573 extends parallel to the second surface 5574, and perpendicular to the third surface 5575. In some embodiments, a portion of the channel 5513 is void of one of the surfaces. For example in the illustrated embodiment, the heel end 5522 portion and the toe end 5518 portion of the channel 5513 is void of the second surface 5574. The channel 5513 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 5579 that directly intersect the first surface 5573, the second surface 5574, and the third surface 5575. The additional end surfaces 5579 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 5583 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 5582 can be flush with an outer surface 5590 of the club head 5510. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 5510 aerodynamics.
The channel 5513 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 5510, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 5575. In the illustrated embodiment, the depth of the channel 5513 at the rear 5523 is more shallow than the depth of the channel 5513 at the heel end 5522 and the toe end 5518. In some embodiments, the channel 5513 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 5518 to the heel end 5522. In the some embodiment, the channel 5513 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 5513 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 5518 to the heel end 5522. Thus, when a weight 5582 is coupled to the club head 5510 in one region of the channel 5513, the weight 5582 may fit flush in the channel 5513 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 5573, 5574. When the weight 5582 is coupled to the club head 5510 in a different region of the channel 5513, a portion of the weight 5582 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 5573, 5574. In some embodiments, the channel 5513 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 5534 where a portion of the weight 5582 protrudes beyond the first surface 5573 and/or the second surface 5574 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the channel 5513 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 5566 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 5513 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 5513 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 5513 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 5513 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 5573 and the second surface 5574. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 5513 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 5513 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
The weights 5582 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 5513. In other embodiments, the weights 5582 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 5513. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 5566 comprises one weight 5582. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 5566 can comprise more or less weights 5582 than the number of features 5570A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 5566 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 5582. In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 5582 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 5582 sized and configured to receive the fastener. The fastener can be threaded through the weight 5582 into the corresponding feature 5570, thus securing the weight 5582 to the channel 5513. In some embodiments, the weight 5582 can comprise a filet for receiving the top portion of the screw and therefore the screw can sit flush with the outer portion of the weight 5582. In other embodiments, the weight 5582 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 5582. In other embodiments, the weight 5582 can be devoid of an aperture. In other embodiments, the weights 5582 can further be secured the features 5570 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 5570A, B, C can receives the fastener extended through the weight 5582. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 5570A, B, C receives a weight 5582, while the remaining features 5570A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5570A, B, C receives more than one weight 5582.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 5582 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 5582 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 5582 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 5582 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5582 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 5582 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 5582 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5582 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 5582. In some embodiments, each of the weights 5582 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 5582 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 5582 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 5570A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 5582 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 5582, one or more of the weights 5582 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 5582 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 5582 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 5582 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 5582 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5582 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 5582 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 5582 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 5582 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 5582 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 5582 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 5582 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 5582, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5582 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 5582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5582 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5582 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams, and the second, third, and fourth weight 5582 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5582 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 5582 may be strategically positioned on the features 5570A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 5510 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 5582 is positioned on the feature 5570B, located between the toe or toe end 5518 and the heel or heel end 5522, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 5570A, C near the toe or toe end 5518 and the heel or heel end 5522. The aforementioned weight 5582 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 5534 of the club head 5510. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5582 is positioned on the features 5570C near the heel or heel end 5522, while lighter weights 5582 are positioned on the feature 5570A near the toe or toe end 5518 and on the feature 5570B that is located between the toe or toe end 5518 and the heel or heel end 5522. The aforementioned weight 5582 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 5522 of the club head 5510. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5582 is positioned on the feature 5570A near the toe or toe end 5518, while lighter weights 5582 are positioned on the feature 5570C near the heel or heel end 5522 and on the feature 5570B that is located between the toe or toe end 5518 and the heel or heel end 5522. The aforementioned weight 5582 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 5518 of the club head 5510. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 5570A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 5570A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5570A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 5570A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 5582 or set of weights 5582.
The adjustable weighting system 5566 of golf club head 5510 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5566 of golf club head 5510 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5510 having the adjustable weighting system 5566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The first channel 5613 extends from near the toe end 5618 proximate a trailing edge 5672, then continues near a rear 5623, extending away from the trailing edge 5672, and continues near the heel end 5622 proximate the trailing edge 5672 of the club head 5610. In the illustrated embodiment, the first channel 5613 forms a slope-like shape at the rear 5623. In the exemplary embodiment, the club head 5610 can further comprise a second channel 5671. The second channel 5671 is positioned on the sole 5630, near the rear 5623 along the trialing edge. The first channel 5613 is defined by a first surface 5673, a second surface 5674 disposed opposite the first surface 5673, and a third surface 5675 that extends between the first surface 5673 and the second surface 5674. In some embodiments, the first surface 5673 extends parallel to the second surface 5674, and perpendicular to the third surface 5675. In some embodiments, a portion of the first channel 5613 is void of one of the surfaces. The first channel 5613 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 5679 that directly intersect the first surface 5673, the second surface 5674, and the third surface 5675. The additional end surfaces 5679 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 5683 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 5682 can be flush with an outer surface 5690 of the club head 5610. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 5610 aerodynamics.
The first channel 5613 can further comprise a width. The width of the first channel 5613 is measured from perpendicular from the first surface 5673 to the second surface 5674. In the illustrated embodiment, the width of the first channel 5613 at the rear 5623 is less than the width of the first channel 5613 at the heel end 5622 and the toe end 5618. In some embodiments, the first channel 5613 can comprise a constant width from the toe end 5618 to the heel end 5622. In the some embodiment, the first channel 5613 can have a varying width such that it is wider in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing width). In other embodiments, the channel depth 5613 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width along its length from the toe end 5618 to the heel end 5622. In other embodiments, the first channel 5613 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
The first channel 5613 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 5610, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 5675. In the illustrated embodiment, the depth of the first channel 5613 at the rear 5623 is more shallow than the depth of the first channel 5613 at the heel end 5622 and the toe end 5618. In some embodiments, the first channel 5613 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 5618 to the heel end 5622. In the some embodiment, the first channel 5613 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 5613 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 5618 to the heel end 5622. Thus, when a weight 5682 is coupled to the club head 5610 in one region of the first channel 5613, the weight 5682 may fit flush in the first channel 5613 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 5673, 5674. When the weight 5682 is coupled to the club head 5610 in a different region of the first channel 5613, a portion of the weight 5682 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 5673, 5674. In some embodiments, the first channel 5613 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 5634 where a portion of the weight 5682 protrudes beyond the first surface 5673 and/or the second surface 5674 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the first channel 5613 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 5666 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the first channel 5613 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the first channel 5613 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the first channel 5613 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
Referring again to
The weights 5682 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the first channel 5613. In other embodiments, the weights 5682 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the first channel 5613. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 5666 comprises one weight 5682. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 5666 can comprise more or less weights 5682 than the number of features 5670A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 5666 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 5682. In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 5682 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 5682 sized and configured to receive the fastener. The threaded fastener can be threaded through the weight 5682 into the corresponding feature 5670, thus securing the weight 5682 to the first channel 5613. In some embodiments, the weight 5682 can comprise a filet for receiving the top portion of the screw and therefore the screw can sit flush with the outer portion of the weight 5682. In other embodiments, the weight 5682 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 5682. In other embodiments, the weight 5682 can be devoid of an aperture. In other embodiments, the weights 5682 can further be secured the features 5670 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 5670A, B, C can receives the fastener extended through the weight 5682. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 5670A, B, C receives a weight 5682, while the remaining features 5670A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5670A, B, C receives more than one weight 5682.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 5682 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 5682 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 5682 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 5682 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5682 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 5682 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 5682 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5682 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 5682. In some embodiments, each of the weights 5682 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 5682 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 5682 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 5670A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 5682 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 5682, one or more of the weights 5682 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 5682 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 5682 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 5682 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 5682 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5682 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 5682 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 5682 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 5682 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 5682 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 5682 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 5682 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 5682, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5682 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 5682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5682 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5682 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams, and the second, third and fourth weight 5682 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5682 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 5682 may be strategically positioned on the features 5670A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 5610 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 5682 is positioned on the feature 5670B, located between the toe or toe end 5618 and the heel or heel end 5622, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 5670A, C near the toe or toe end 5618 and the heel or heel end 5622. The aforementioned weight 5682 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 5634 of the club head 5610. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5682 is positioned on the features 5670C near the heel or heel end 5622, while lighter weights 5682 are positioned on the feature 5670A near the toe or toe end 5618 and on the feature 5670B that is located between the toe or toe end 5618 and the heel or heel end 5622. The aforementioned weight 5682 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 5622 of the club head 5610. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5682 is positioned on the feature 5670A near the toe or toe end 5618, while lighter weights 5682 are positioned on the feature 5670C near the heel or heel end 5622 and on the feature 5670B that is located between the toe or toe end 5618 and the heel or heel end 5622. The aforementioned weight 5682 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 5618 of the club head 5610. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 5670A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 5670A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5670A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 5670A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 5682 or set of weights 5682.
The adjustable weighting system 5666 of golf club head 5610 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5666 of golf club head 5610 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5610 having the adjustable weighting system 5666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 5713 extends from near the toe end 5718 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 5722 following the contour of the trailing edge 5772 of the club head 5710. The channel 5713 is defined by a first surface 5773, a second surface 5774 disposed opposite the first surface 5773, and a third surface 5775 that extends between the first surface 5773 and the second surface 5774. In some embodiments, the first surface 5773 extends parallel to the second surface 5774, and perpendicular to the third surface 5775. The channel 5713 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 5779 that directly intersect the first surface 5773, the second surface 5774, and the third surface 5775. The additional end surfaces 5779 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 5783 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 5782 can be flush with an outer surface 5790 of the club head 5710. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 5710 aerodynamics.
The channel 5713 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 5710, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 5775. In some embodiments, the channel 5713 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 5718 to the heel end 5722. In the some embodiment, the channel 5713 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 5713 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 5718 to the heel end 5722. Thus, when a weight 5782 is coupled to the club head 5710 in one region of the channel 5713, the weight 5782 may fit flush in the channel 5713 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 5773, 5774. When the weight 5782 is coupled to the club head 5710 in a different region of the channel 5713, a portion of the weight 5782 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 5773, 5774. In some embodiments, the channel 5713 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 5734 where a portion of the weight 5782 protrudes beyond the first surface 5773 and/or the second surface 5774 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the channel 5713 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 5766 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 5713 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 5713 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 5713 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 5713 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 5773 and the second surface 5774. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 5713 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 5713 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
The weights 5782 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 5713. In other embodiments, the weights 5782 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 5713. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 5766 comprises one weight 5782. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 5766 can comprise more or less weights 5782 than the number of features 5770A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 5766 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine or ten weights 5782. In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 5782 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 5782 sized and configured to receive the fastener. The fastener can be threaded through the weight 5782 into the corresponding feature 5770, thus securing the weight 5782 to the channel 5713. In some embodiments, the weight 5782 can comprise a filet for receiving the top portion of the screw and therefore the screw can sit flush with the outer portion of the weight 5782. In other embodiments, the weight 5782 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 5782. In other embodiments, the weight 5782 can be devoid of an aperture. In other embodiments, the weights 5782 can further be secured the features 5770 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 5770A, B, C can receives the fastener extended through the weight 5782. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 5770A, B, C receives a weight 5782, while the remaining features 5770A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5770A, B, C receives more than one weight 5782.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 5782 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 5782 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 5782 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 5782 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5782 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 5782 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 5782 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5782 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 5782. In some embodiments, each of the weights 5782 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 5782 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 5782 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 5770A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 5782 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 5782, one or more of the weights 5782 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 5782 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 5782 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 5782 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 5782 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5782 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 5782 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 5782 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 5782 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 5782 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 5782 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 5782 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 5782, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5782 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 5782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5782 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first, second, and third weight 5782 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams, and the fourth weight 5782 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5782 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 5782 may be strategically positioned on the features 5770A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 5710 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 5782 is positioned on the feature 5770B, located between the toe or toe end 5718 and the heel or heel end 5722, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 5770A, C near the toe or toe end 5718 and the heel or heel end 5722. The aforementioned weight 5782 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 5734 of the club head 5710. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5782 is positioned on the features 5770C near the heel or heel end 5722, while lighter weights 5782 are positioned on the feature 5770A near the toe or toe end 5718 and on the feature 5770B that is located between the toe or toe end 5718 and the heel or heel end 5722. The aforementioned weight 5782 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 5722 of the club head 5710. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5782 is positioned on the feature 5770A near the toe or toe end 5718, while lighter weights 5782 are positioned on the feature 5770C near the heel or heel end 5722 and on the feature 5770B that is located between the toe or toe end 5718 and the heel or heel end 5722. The aforementioned weight 5782 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 5718 of the club head 5710. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 5770A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 5770A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5770A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 5770A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 5782 or set of weights 5782.
With continued reference to
The adjustable weighting system 5766 of golf club head 5710 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5766 of golf club head 5710 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5710 having the adjustable weighting system 5766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The shallow recessed portion 5880 is positioned on a sole of the club head 5830 and extends from near the toe end 5818 proximate a trailing edge 5872, to near the heel end 5822 in an arcuate fashion (forming a U-shape). In other embodiments, the recessed portion can be positioned on any portion of the sole 5830 and form any shape. The recessed portion 5880 comprises a recessed surface 5881, and a wall 5883 separating the recessed surface 5881 with the remaining outer surface 5890 of the sole. In the exemplary embodiment, the club head 5810 can further comprise a channel 5871. The channel 5871 is positioned on the sole 5830, near the rear 5823 along the trialing edge.
In many embodiments, the recessed portion 5880 can be shallow ensuring the adjustable weight system 5866 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 5880 has a maximum depth (measured perpendicularly to the recessed surface 5881 of the recessed portion 5880) of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 5880 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 5880 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
Referring again to
The weights 5882 have a generally trapezoidal shape. In other embodiments, the weights 5882 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit in the recessed portion 5880. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 5866 comprises one weight 5882. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 5866 can comprise more or less weights 5882 than the number of features 5870. For example, the adjustable weighting system 5866 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 5882. In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 5882 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 5882 sized and configured to receive the fastener 5876. The fastener 5876 can be threaded through the weight 5882 into the corresponding feature 5870, thus securing the weight 5882 to the recessed portion 5880. In other embodiments, the weight 5882 can be devoid of an aperture. In other embodiments, the weights 5882 can further be secured the features 5870 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure. In some embodiments, when the weights 5882 are coupled to the features 5870, the weights 5882 can be flush with the outer surface 5890 of the club head 5810. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 5810 aerodynamics.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 5870A, B, C can receives the fastener 5876 extended through the weight 5882. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 5870A, B, C receives a weight 5882, while the remaining features 5870A, B, C are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5870A, B, C receives more than one weight 5882.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 5882 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 5882 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 5882 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 5882 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5882 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 5882 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 5882 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5882 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 5882. In some embodiments, each of the weights 5882 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 5882 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 5882 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 5870A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 5882 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 5882, one or more of the weights 5882 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 5882 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 5882 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 5882 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 5882 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5882 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 5882 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 5882 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 5882 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 5882 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 5882 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 5882 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 5882, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5882 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5882 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5882 can have a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 5882 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5882 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5882 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5882 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams, and the second, third, and fourth weight 5882 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5882 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 5882 may be strategically positioned on the features 5870A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 5810 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 5882 can be positioned on the feature 5870B, located between the toe or toe end 5818 and the heel or heel end 5822, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 5870A, C near the toe or toe end 5818 and the heel or heel end 5822. The aforementioned weight 5882 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 5834 of the club head 5810. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5882 can be positioned on the features 5870C near the heel or heel end 5822, while lighter weights 5882 are positioned on the feature 5870A near the toe or toe end 5818 and on the feature 5870B that is located between the toe or toe end 5818 and the heel or heel end 5822. The aforementioned weight 5882 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 5822 of the club head 5810. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5882 can be positioned on the feature 5870A near the toe or toe end 5818, while lighter weights 5882 are positioned on the feature 5870C near the heel or heel end 5822 and on the feature 5870B that is located between the toe or toe end 5818 and the heel or heel end 5822. The aforementioned weight 5882 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 5818 of the club head 5810. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 5870 are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 5870. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5870 can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 5870 has its own corresponding weight 5882 or set of weights 5882.
The adjustable weighting system 5866 of golf club head 5810 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5866 of golf club head 5810 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5810 having the adjustable weighting system 5866 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 5913 extends from near the toe end 5918 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 5922 following the contour of the trailing edge 5972 of the club head 5910. The channel 5913 is defined by a first surface 5973, a second surface 5974 disposed opposite the first surface 5973, and a third surface 5975 that extends between the first surface 5973 and the second surface 5974. In some embodiments, the first surface 5973 extends parallel to the second surface 5974, and perpendicular to the third surface 5975. The channel 5913 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 5979 that directly intersect the first surface 5973, the second surface 5974, and the third surface 5975. The additional end surfaces 5979 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 5983 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 5982 can be flush with an outer surface 5990 of the club head 5910. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 5910 aerodynamics.
The channel 5913 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 5910, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 5975. In some embodiments, the channel 5913 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 5918 to the heel end 5922. In the some embodiment, the channel 5913 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 5913 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 5918 to the heel end 5922. Thus, when a weight 5982 is coupled to the club head 5910 in one region of the channel 5913, the weight 5982 may fit flush in the channel 5913 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 5973, 5974. When the weight 5982 is coupled to the club head 5910 in a different region of the channel 5913, a portion of the weight 5982 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 5973, 5974. In some embodiments, the channel 5913 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 5934 where a portion of the weight 5982 protrudes beyond the first surface 5973 and/or the second surface 5974 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the channel 5913 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 5966 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 5913 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 5913 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 5913 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 5913 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 5973 and the second surface 5974. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 5913 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 5913 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
The weights 5982 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 5913. In other embodiments, the weights 5982 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 5913. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 5966 comprises one weight 5982. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 5966 can comprise more or less weights 5982 than the number of features 5970A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 5966 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 5982. In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 5982 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 5982 sized and configured to receive the fastener 5976. The fastener 5976 can be received by the feature 5970 and into the weight 5982, thus securing the weight 5982 to the channel 5913. In other embodiments, the weight 5982 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 5982. In other embodiments, the weight 5982 can be devoid of an aperture. In other embodiments, the weights 5982 can further be secured at the features 5970 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 5970 can receive the fastener 5976, wherein the fastener 5976 extends through the weight 5982. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 5970 receives a weight 5982, while the remaining features 5970 are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5970 receives more than one weight 5982. The weights 5982 can be decoupled from the feature by removing the fastener 5976.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 5982 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 5982 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 5982 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 5982 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5982 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 5982 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 5982 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 5982 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 5982. In some embodiments, each of the weights 5982 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 5982 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 5982 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 5970A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 5982 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 5982, one or more of the weights 5982 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 5982 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 5982 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 5982 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 5982 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5982 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 5982 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 5982 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 5982 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 5982 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 5982 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 5982 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 5982, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 5982 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5982 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5982 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 5982 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 5982 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 5982 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first, second, and third weight 5982 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams, and the fourth weight 5982 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 5982 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 5982 may be strategically positioned and coupled to the features 5970 to achieve a desired club head 5910 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 5982 is positioned at the feature 5970B, located between the toe or toe end 5918 and the heel or heel end 5922, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 5970 near the toe or toe end 5918 and the heel or heel end 5922. The fastener 5976 can be coupled to the feature 5970B and weight 5982 to secure the weight 5982 within the channel 5913 at the distinct location. The aforementioned weight 5982 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 5934 of the club head 5910. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5982 is positioned on the features 5970 near the heel or heel end 5922, while lighter weights 5982 are positioned on the feature 5970A near the toe or toe end 5918 and on the feature 5970B that is located between the toe or toe end 5918 and the heel or heel end 5922. The aforementioned weight 5982 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 5922 of the club head 5910. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 5982 is positioned on the feature 5970A near the toe or toe end 5918, while lighter weights 5982 are positioned on the feature 5970 near the heel or heel end 5922 and on the feature 5970B that is located between the toe or toe end 5918 and the heel or heel end 5922. The aforementioned weight 5982 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 5918 of the club head 5910. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 5970 are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 5970. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 5970 can have a differing size and shape, such that each features has its own corresponding weight 5982 or set of weights 5982. Each of the weights 5982 can be coupled to the feature by tightening the fastener 5976, while the weights 5982 can be decoupled to the feature by loosening and taking out the fastener 5976.
With continued reference to
The adjustable weighting system 5966 of golf club head 5910 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 5966 of golf club head 5910 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 5910 having the adjustable weighting system 5966 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 6013 extends from near the toe end 6018 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 6022 following the contour of the trailing edge 6072 of the club head 6010. The channel 6013 is defined by a first surface 6073, a second surface 6074 disposed opposite the first surface 6073, and a third surface 6075 that extends between the first surface 6073 and the second surface 6074. In some embodiments, the first surface 6073 extends parallel to the second surface 6074, and perpendicular to the third surface 6075. In some embodiments as illustrated, the sole 6030 at the second surface 6074 can comprise a sloped contour wherein the sole 6030 at the second surface 6074 looks like a lip. In other embodiments, the sole 6030 at the second surface 6074 can follow the general trend of the contour of the remaining sole 6030. The channel 6013 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 6079 that directly intersect the first surface 6073, the second surface 6074, and the third surface 6075. The additional end surfaces 6079 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 6083 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 6082 can be flush with an outer surface 6090 of the club head 6010. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 6010 aerodynamics.
The channel 6013 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 6010, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 6075. In some embodiments, the channel 6013 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 6018 to the heel end 6022. In the some embodiment, the channel 6013 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 6013 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 6018 to the heel end 6022. Thus, when a weight 6082 is coupled to the club head 6010 in one region of the channel 6013, the weight 6082 may fit flush in the channel 6013 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 6073, 6074. When the weight 6082 is coupled to the club head 6010 in a different region of the channel 6013, a portion of the weight 6082 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 6073, 6074. In some embodiments, the channel 6013 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 6034 where a portion of the weight 6082 protrudes beyond the first surface 6073 and/or the second surface 6074 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the channel 6013 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6066 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 6013 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 6013 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 6013 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 6013 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 6073 and the second surface 6074. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 6013 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 6013 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
The feature 6070 is configured to receive a fastener 6076. The fastener 6076 can comprise threading to be secured into the feature 6070. In other embodiments, the fastener 6076 can be secured into the feature 6070 by press-fit, an adhesive, or by any other coupling means.
The weights 6082 of the adjustable weighting system 6066 have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 6013. In other embodiments, the weights 6082 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 6013. In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 6066 comprises one weight 6082. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 6066 can comprise more or less weights 6082 than the number of features 6070A, B, C. For example, the adjustable weighting system 6066 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 6082. The weights 6082 can comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 6082 sized and configured to receive the fastener 6076. The fastener 6076 can be received by the feature 6070 and into the weight 6082, thus securing the weight 6082 to the channel 6013. In other embodiments, the weight 6082 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 6082, wherein the fastener 6076 presses against the blind aperture, thereby press fitting the weigh 6082 within the channel 6013 at the distinct location of the feature 6070. In other embodiments, the weight 6082 can be devoid of an aperture and the fastener 6076 presses against the weight 6082 to secure the weight 6082. In other embodiments, the weights 6082 can further be secured at the features 6070 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 6070 can receive the fastener 6076, wherein the fastener 6076 extends through (or abuts the weight 6082, or abuts the blind aperture) the weight 6082. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 6070 receives a weight 6082, while the remaining features 6070 are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6070 receives more than one weight 6082. The weights 6082 can be decoupled from the feature by removing the fastener 6076.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 6082 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6082 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 6082 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6082 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6082 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6082 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6082 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6082 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6082. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6082 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6082 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6082 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6070A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 6082 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6082, one or more of the weights 6082 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6082 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6082 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6082 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6082 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6082 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6082 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6082 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6082 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6082 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6082 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6082 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6082, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6082 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6082 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6082 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6082 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6082 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6082 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, the first weight 6082 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams, and the second, and third, and fourth weight 6082 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 6082 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 6082 may be strategically positioned and coupled to the features 6070 to achieve a desired club head 6010 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6082 is positioned at the feature 6070B, located between the toe or toe end 6018 and the heel or heel end 6022, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6070A, C near the toe or toe end 6018 and the heel or heel end 6022. The fastener 6076 can be coupled to the feature 6070B and weight 6082 to secure the weight 6082 within the channel 6013 at the distinct location. The aforementioned weight 6082 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6034 of the club head 6010. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6082 is positioned on the features 6070C near the heel or heel end 6022, while lighter weights 6082 are positioned on the feature 6070A near the toe or toe end 6018 and on the feature 6070B that is located between the toe or toe end 6018 and the heel or heel end 6022. The aforementioned weight 6082 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6022 of the club head 6010. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6082 is positioned on the feature 6070A near the toe or toe end 6018, while lighter weights 6082 are positioned on the feature 6070C near the heel or heel end 6022 and on the feature 6070B that is located between the toe or toe end 6018 and the heel or heel end 6022. The aforementioned weight 6082 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6018 of the club head 6010. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6070A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6070A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6070A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 6070A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 6082 or set of weights 6082.
The adjustable weighting system 6066 of golf club head 6010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6066 of golf club head 6010 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6010 having the adjustable weighting system 6066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
As illustrated in
The channel 6113 extends from near the toe end 6118 in an arcuate manner to near the heel end 6122 following the contour of the trailing edge 6172 of the club head 6110. The channel 6113 is defined by a first surface 6173, a second surface 6174 disposed opposite the first surface 6173, and a third surface 6175 that extends between the first surface 6173 and the second surface 6174. In some embodiments, the first surface 6173 extends parallel to the second surface 6174, and perpendicular to the third surface 6175. In some embodiments as illustrated, the sole 6130 at the second surface 6174 can comprise a sloped contour wherein the sole 6130 at the second surface 6174 looks like a lip. In other embodiments, the sole 6130 at the second surface 6174 can follow the general trend of the contour of the remaining sole 6130. The channel 6113 is further defined in part by additional end surfaces 6179 that directly intersect the first surface 6173, the second surface 6174, and the third surface 6175. The additional end surfaces 6179 may provide added support and/or provide an abutment region or edge against which the weights 6183 may rest. In some embodiments, the weights 6182 can be flush with an outer surface 6190 of the club head 6110. The flush orientation may improve air flow characteristics during a swing to improve the club head 6110 aerodynamics.
The channel 6113 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 6110, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 6175. In some embodiments, the channel 6113 can comprise a constant depth from the toe end 6118 to the heel end 6122. In the some embodiment, the channel 6113 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 6113 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 6118 to the heel end 6122. Thus, when a weight 6182 is coupled to the club head 6110 in one region of the channel 6113, the weight 6182 may fit flush in the channel 6113 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 6173, 6174. When the weight 6182 is coupled to the club head 6110 in a different region of the channel 6113, a portion of the weight 6182 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 6173, 6174. In some embodiments, the channel 6113 includes a region or regions at the rear or back end 6134 where a portion of the weight 6182 protrudes beyond the first surface 6173 and/or the second surface 6174 when coupled.
In many embodiments, the channel 6113 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6166 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 6113 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 6113 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 6113 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 6113 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 6173 and the second surface 6174. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 6113 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 6113 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
The feature 6170 is configured to receive a fastener 6176. The fastener 6176 can comprise threading to be secured into the feature 6170. In other embodiments, the fastener 6176 can be secured into the feature 6170 by press-fit, an adhesive, or by any other coupling means.
In the illustrated embodiments, the weights 6182 comprises a first portion 6183, and a second portion 6184. The first portion 6183 of the weights 6182 can have a generally rectangular shape corresponding with the shape of the channel 6113. The second portions 6184 of the weights 6182 can have a rectangular shape. In other embodiments, both the first and second portion 6183 and 6184 of the weights 6182 can have a circular, triangular, trapezoidal, polygonal or any other suitable shape configured to fit within the channel 6113. The first portion 6183 of the weights 6182 is configured to be placed within the channel 6113, while the second portion 6184 of the weights 6182 is configured to be place on the sole 6130 over the second surface 6174 (i.e., the first and second portion 6183 and 6184 sandwiches the second surface 6174 of the channel 6113). In the illustrated embodiment, the adjustable weighting system 6166 comprises one weight 6182. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 6166 can comprise more or less weights 6182 than the number of features 6170. For example, the adjustable weighting system 6166 can comprise one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine to ten weights 6182. The weights 6182 can comprise apertures extending entirely through both the first and second portion 6183 and 6184 configured to receive the fastener 6176. The fastener 6176 can be received by second portion 6184, through the feature 6170, and into the first portion 6183, thus securing the weight 6182 to the channel 6113. In other embodiments, the first portion 6183 of the weight 6182 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 6182, wherein the fastener 6176 presses against the blind aperture, thereby press fitting the weigh 6182 within the channel 6113 at the distinct location of the feature 6170. In other embodiments, the first portion 6183 of the weight 6182 can be devoid of an aperture and the fastener 6176 presses against the first portion 6183 of the weight 6182 to secure the weight 6182. In other embodiments, the weights 6182 can further be secured at the features 6170 through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In the illustrated embodiment each of the features 6170 can receive the fastener 6176, wherein the fastener 6176 extends through (or abuts the weight 6182, or abuts the blind aperture) the weight 6182. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 6170 receives a weight 6182, while the remaining features 6170 are bare and uncovered, or are covered with another material or structure. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6170 receives more than one weight 6182. The weights 6182 can be decoupled from the feature by removing the fastener 6176.
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 6182 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6182 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 6182 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6182 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6182 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6182 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6182 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6182 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6182. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6182 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6182 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6182 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6170. In some embodiments, the weights 6182 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6182, one or more of the weights 6182 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6182 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6182 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6182 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6182 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6182 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6182 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6182 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6182 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6182 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6182 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6182 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6182, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6182 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6182 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6182 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6182 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6182 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6182 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6182 can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the second, third, and the fourth weight 6182 can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights 6182 may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 6182 may be strategically positioned and coupled to the features 6170 to achieve a desired club head 6110 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6182 is positioned at the feature 6170B, located between the toe or toe end 6118 and the heel or heel end 6122, while lighter weights are positioned on the feature 6170A near the toe or toe end 6118 and the feature 6170C heel or heel end 6122. The fastener 6176 can be coupled to the feature 6170B and weight 6182 to secure the weight 6182 within the channel 6113 at the distinct location. The aforementioned weight 6182 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6134 of the club head 6110. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6182 is positioned on the features 6170C near the heel or heel end 6122, while lighter weights 6182 are positioned on the feature 6170A near the toe or toe end 6118 and on the feature 6170B that is located between the toe or toe end 6118 and the heel or heel end 6122. The aforementioned weight 6182 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6122 of the club head 6110. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6182 is positioned on the feature 6170A near the toe or toe end 6118, while lighter weights 6182 are positioned on the feature 6170C near the heel or heel end 6122 and on the feature 6170B that is located between the toe or toe end 6118 and the heel or heel end 6122. The aforementioned weight 6182 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6118 of the club head 6110. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6170 are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6170. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6170 can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 6170 has its own corresponding weight 6182 or set of weights 6182.
The adjustable weighting system 6166 of golf club head 6110 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6166 of golf club head 6110 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6110 having the adjustable weighting system 6166 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the channel 6213 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6266 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 6213 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 6213 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 6213 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 6213 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 6273 and the second surface 6274. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 6213 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 6213 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
For the purposes of this example, in the illustrated embodiment, the features 6270 A, B, C can be apertures configured to receive a screw. The screw can be comprised of a material having density, which is the same or less than the density of the club head 6210. As illustrated, the features 6270 A, B, C are disposed within the channel 6213 along the third surface 6275 such that one or more weights 6282 may be releasably coupled to the club head 6210 along the channel 6213. More specifically, a first feature 6270A is positioned along the first region 6277 of the channel 6213 near the toe end 6218, a second feature 6270C is positioned along the second region 6276 of the channel 6213 near the heel end 6222, and a third feature 6270C is positioned along a third region 6278 of the channel 6213 between the toe and heel end 6218, 6222.
With continued reference to
Referring again to
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 6282 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6282 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 6282 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6282 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6282 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6282 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6282 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6282 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6282. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6282 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6282 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6282 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6270A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 6282 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6282, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6282 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6282 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6282 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6282 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6282 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6282 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6282 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6282 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6282 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6282 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6282 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6282, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6282 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6282 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6282 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6282 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6282 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6282 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 6282 may be strategically positioned on the features 6270A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 6210 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6282 is positioned on the feature 6270B, located between the toe or toe end 6218 and the heel or heel end 6222, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6270A, C near the toe or toe end 6218 and the heel or heel end 6222. The aforementioned weight 6282 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6234 of the club head 6210. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6282 is positioned on the features 6270C near the heel or heel end 6222, while lighter weights 6282 are positioned on the feature 6270A near the toe or toe end 6218 and on the feature 6270B that is located between the toe or toe end 6218 and the heel or heel end 6222. The aforementioned weight 6282 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6222 of the club head 6210. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6282 is positioned on the feature 6270A near the toe or toe end 6218, while lighter weights 6282 are positioned on the feature 6270C near the heel or heel end 6222 and on the feature 6270B that is located between the toe or toe end 6218 and the heel or heel end 6222. The aforementioned weight 6282 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6218 of the club head 6210. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6270A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6270A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6270A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each feature 6270A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 6282 or set of weights 6282.
The adjustable weighting system 6266 of golf club head 6210 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6266 of golf club head 6210 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6210 having the adjustable weighting system 6266 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
The channel 6313 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 6310, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 6375. In the illustrated embodiment, the channel 6313 has a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 6313 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 6318 to the heel end 6322. Thus, when a weight 6382 is coupled to the club head 6310 in one region of the channel 6313, the weight 6382 may fit flush in the channel 6313 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 6373, 6374. When the weight 6382 is coupled to the club head 6310 in a different region of the channel 6313, a portion of the weight 6382 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 6373, 6374. As illustrated in
In many embodiments, the channel 6313 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6366 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 6313 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 6313 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 6313 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 6313 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 6373 and the second surface 6374. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 6313 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 6313 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
For the purposes of this example, in the illustrated embodiment, the features 6370 A, B, C can be apertures configured to receive a screw. The screw can be comprised of a material having density which is the same or less than the density of the club head 6310. As illustrated, the features 6370 A, B, C are disposed within the channel 6313 along the third surface 6375 such that one or more weights 6382 may be releasable coupled to the club head 6310 along the channel 6313. More specifically, a first feature 6370A is positioned along the first region 6377 of the channel 6313 near the toe end 6318, a second feature 6370C is positioned along the second region 6376 of the channel 6313 near the heel end 6322, and a third feature 6370C is positioned along a third region 6378 of the channel 6313 between the toe and heel end 6318, 6322.
With continued reference to
Referring again to
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 6382 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6382 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 6382 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6382 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6382 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6382 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6382 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6382 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6382. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6382 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6382 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6382 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6370A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 6382 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6382, one or more of the weights 6382 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6382 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6382 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6382 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6382 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6382 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6382 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6382 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6382 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6382 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6382 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6382, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6382 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6382 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g. The weights 6382 may be strategically positioned on the features 6370A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 6310 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6382 is positioned on the feature 6370B, located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6370A, C near the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 6382 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6334 of the club head 6310. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6382 is positioned on the features 6370C near the heel or heel end 6322, while lighter weights 6382 are positioned on the feature 6370A near the toe or toe end 6318 and on the feature 6370B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 6382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6322 of the club head 6310. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6382 is positioned on the feature 6370A near the toe or toe end 6318, while lighter weights 6382 are positioned on the feature 6370C near the heel or heel end 6322 and on the feature 6370B that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 6382 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6318 of the club head 6310 In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6370A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6370A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6370A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each feature 6370A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 6382 or set of weights 6382.
The adjustable weighting system 6366 of golf club head 6310 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6366 of golf club head 6310 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6310 having the adjustable weighting system 6366 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
The channel 6413 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 6410, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 6475. The depth can be measured from the first surface 6473 to the third surface 6375. In the illustrated embodiment, the channel 6413 has a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the channel depth 6413 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 6418 to the heel end 6422. Thus, when a weight 6482 is coupled to the club head 6410 in one region of the channel 6413, the weight 6482 may fit flush in the channel 6413 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 6473, 6474. When the weight 6482 is coupled to the club head 6410 in a different region of the channel 6413, a portion of the weight 6482 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 6473, 6474. As illustrated in
In many embodiments, the channel 6413 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6466 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 6413 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 6413 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 6413 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 6413 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 6473 and the second surface 6474. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 6413 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 6413 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
For the purposes of this example, in the illustrated embodiment, the features 6470 A, B, C can be apertures configured to receive a screw. The screw can be comprised of a material having density which is the same or less than the density of the club head 6410. As illustrated, the features 6470 A, B, C are disposed within the channel 6413 along the third surface 6475 such that one or more weights 6482 may be releasable coupled to the club head 6410 along the channel 6413. More specifically, a first feature 6470A is positioned along the first region 6477 of the channel 6413 near the toe end 6418, a second feature 6470C is positioned along the second region 6476 of the channel 6413 near the heel end 6422, and a third feature 6470C is positioned along a third region 6478 of the channel 6413 between the toe and heel end 6418, 6422.
With continued reference to
Referring again to
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 6482 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6482 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 6482 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6482 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6482 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6482 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6482 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6482 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6482. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6482 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6482 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6482 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6470A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 6482 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6482, one or more of the weights 6482 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6482 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6482 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6482 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6482 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6482 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6482 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6482 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6482 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6482 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6482 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6482 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6482, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6482 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6482 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6482 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6482 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 6482 may be strategically positioned on the features 6470A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 6410 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6482 is positioned on the feature 6470B, located between the toe or toe end 6418 and the heel or heel end 6422, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6470A, C near the toe or toe end 6418 and the heel or heel end 6422. The aforementioned weight 6482 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6434 of the club head 6410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6482 is positioned on the features 6470C near the heel or heel end 6422, while lighter weights 6482 are positioned on the feature 6470A near the toe or toe end 6418 and on the feature 6470B that is located between the toe or toe end 6418 and the heel or heel end 6422. The aforementioned weight 6482 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6422 of the club head 6410. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6482 is positioned on the feature 6470A near the toe or toe end 6418, while lighter weights 6482 are positioned on the feature 6470C near the heel or heel end 6422 and on the feature 6470B that is located between the toe or toe end 6418 and the heel or heel end 6422. The aforementioned weight 6482 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6418 of the club head 6410. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6470A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6470A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6470A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each feature 6470A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 6482 or set of weights 6482.
The adjustable weighting system 6466 of golf club head 6410 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6466 of golf club head 6410 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6410 having the adjustable weighting system 6466 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the channel 6513 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6566 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 6580 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 6580 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 6580 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the recessed portion 6580 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 6583 and the trailing edge 6572 or back end 6534. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 6580 includes a varying width. The first region 6577 has an increasing width from the toe end 6518 towards the center or third region 6578, the second region 6576 comprises an increasing width from the heel end 6522 towards the center and or third portion 6578, and the third region 6578 comprises a constant width which is smaller than the average width of the first and or second regions 6577, 6576. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 6580 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated, the features 6570A, B, C, D, E are disposed within the recessed portion 6580 along the recessed surface 6581 such that one or more weights 6582 may be releasable coupled to the club head 6510 along the recessed portion 6580. More specifically, a first feature 6570A is positioned along the first region 6577 of the recessed portion 6580 near the toe end 6518, a second feature 6570E is positioned along the second region 6576 of the recessed portion near the heel end 6522, a third feature 6570C is positioned along a third region 6578 of the recessed portion 6580 between the toe and heel end 6518, 6522, a fourth feature 6570B is positioned between the first feature 6570A and the third feature 6570C, and a fifth feature 6570D positioned between the third feature 6570C and the second feature 6570E. In some embodiments, the features 6570A, B, C, D, E can be positioned on the wall 6583 of the recessed portion 6580. In other embodiments, the features 6570A, B, C can be positioned on the wall 6583 and the recessed surface 6581 of the recessed portion 6580.
With continued reference to
In embodiments wherein the adjustable weight system 6566 comprises more than one weight 6582, each of the weights 6582 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6582 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 6582 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6582 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6582 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6582 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6582 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6582 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6582. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6582 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6582 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6582 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6570A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 6582 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6582, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6582 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6582 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6582 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6582 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6582 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6582 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6582 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6582 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6582 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6582 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6582 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6582, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6582 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6582 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6582 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6582 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 6582 may be strategically positioned on the features 6570A, B, C, D, E to achieve a desired club head 6510 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6582 is positioned on the feature 6570C, located between the toe or toe end 6518 and the heel or heel end 6522, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6570A,B, D, E near the toe or toe end 6518 and the heel or heel end 6522. The aforementioned weight 6582 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6534 of the club head 6510. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6582 is positioned on the feature 6570E and/or 6570D near the heel or heel end 6522, while lighter weights 6582 are positioned on the feature 6270A, B near the toe or toe end 6518 and on the feature 6570C that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 6582 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6522 of the club head 6510. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6582 is positioned on the feature 6570A and/or 6570B near the toe or toe end 6518, while lighter weights 6582 are positioned on the features 6270D, E near the heel or heel end 6522 and on the feature 6570C that is located between the toe or toe end 6518 and the heel or heel end 6522. The aforementioned weight 6582 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6518 of the club head 6510. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6570A, B, C, D, E are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6570A, B, C, D, E. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6570A, B, C, D, E can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 6570A, B, C, D, E has its own corresponding weight 6582 or set of weights 6582. Further, because the features 6570 A, B, C, D, E are spaced away from the sole towards the strike face, adjusting the weights 6582 can also effect the spin imparted on the ball after impact.
The adjustable weighting system 6566 of golf club head 6510 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6566 of golf club head 6510 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6510 having the adjustable weighting system 6566 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
The channel 6613 includes a depth measured along a direction toward a center of the club head 6610, and/or along a direction that is normal to the third surface 6675. In the illustrated embodiment, the channel 6613 has a constant depth. In other embodiments, the channel depth 6613 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 6618 to the heel end 6622. In other embodiments, the channel cn have different regions having different constant depths. Thus, when a weight 6682 is coupled to the club head 6610 in one region of the channel 6613, the weight 6682 may fit flush in the channel 6613 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 6673, 6674. When the weight 6682 is coupled to the club head 6610 in a different region of the channel 6613, a portion of the weight 6682 may protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 6673, 6674. In many embodiments, the channel 6613 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6666 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 6613 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 6613 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 6613 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 6613 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 6673 and the second surface 6674. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 6613 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 6613 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated, the features 6670 A, B, C are disposed within the channel 6613 along the third surface 6675 such that one or more weights 6682 may be releasable coupled to the club head 6610 along the channel 6613. More specifically, a first feature 6670A is positioned between the second protruding element 6691 and the toe end 6618, a second feature 6670C is positioned between the first protruding element 6690 and the heel end 6622, and a third feature 6670C is positioned between the first protruding element 6690 and the second protruding element 6691.
With continued reference to
In embodiments wherein the adjustable weight system 6666 comprises more than one screw fastener 6685, each of the weights 6682 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6682 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 6682 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6682 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6682 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6682 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6682 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6682 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6682. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6682 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6682 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6682 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6670A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 6682 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6682, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6682 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6682 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6682 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6682 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6682 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6682 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6682 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6682 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6682 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6682 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6682 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6682, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6682 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6682 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6682 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6682 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 6682 may be strategically positioned on the features 6670A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 6610 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6682 is positioned on the feature 6670B, located between the toe or toe end 6618 and the heel or heel end 6622, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6670A, C near the toe or toe end 6618 and the heel or heel end 6622. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6234 of the club head 6210. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6682 is positioned on the features 6670C near the heel or heel end 6622, while lighter weights 6682 are positioned on the feature 6670A near the toe or toe end 6618 and on the feature 6670B that is located between the toe or toe end 6618 and the heel or heel end 6622. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6222 of the club head 6210. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6682 is positioned on the feature 6670A near the toe or toe end 6618, while lighter weights 6682 are positioned on the feature 6670C near the heel or heel end 6622 and on the feature 6670B that is located between the toe or toe end 6618 and the heel or heel end 6622. The aforementioned weight placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6218 of the club head 6210. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6670A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6670A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6670A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each feature 6670A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 6682 or set of weights 6682.
The adjustable weighting system 6666 of golf club head 6610 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6666 of golf club head 6610 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6610 having the adjustable weighting system 6666 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
In many embodiments, the channel 6713 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6766 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 6780 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 6780 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 6780 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the recessed portion 6780 includes a width measured as the distance between the wall 6783 and the trailing edge 6772 or back end 6734. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 6780 includes a varying width. The first region 6777 has an increasing width from the toe end 6718 towards the center or third region 6778, the second region 6776 comprises an increasing width from the heel end 6722 towards the center and or third portion 6778, and the third region 6778 comprises a constant width which is smaller than the average width of the first and or second regions 6777, 6776. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 6780 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated, the features 6770A, B, C, D, E are disposed within the recessed portion 6780 along the recessed surface 6781 such that one or more weights 6782 may be releasable coupled to the club head 6710 along the recessed portion 6780. More specifically, a first feature 6770A is positioned along the first region 6777 of the recessed portion 6780 near the toe end 6718, a second feature 6770E is positioned along the second region 6776 of the recessed portion near the heel end 6722, a third feature 6770C is positioned along a third region 6778 of the recessed portion 6780 between the toe and heel end 6718, 6722, a fourth feature 6770B is positioned between the first feature 6770A and the third feature 6770C, and a fifth feature 6770D positioned between the third feature 6770C and the second feature 6770E. In some embodiments, the features 6770A, B, C, D, E can be positioned on the wall 6783 of the recessed portion 6780. In other embodiments, the features 6770A, B, C can be positioned on the wall 6783 and the recessed surface 6781 of the recessed portion 6780.
With continued reference to
In embodiments wherein the adjustable weight system 6766 comprises more than one weight 6782, each of the weights 6782 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6782 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 6782 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6782 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6782 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6782 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6782 may have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6782 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6782. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6782 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6782 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6782 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6770A, B, C. In some embodiments, the weights 6782 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6782, one or more of the weights 82 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6782 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6782 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6782 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6782 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6782 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6782 may vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 6782 may vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 may vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 6782 may vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6782 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6782 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6782 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6782, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6782 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6782 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6782 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6782 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 6782 may be strategically positioned on the features 6770A, B, C, D, E to achieve a desired club head 6710 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6782 is positioned on the feature 6770C, located between the toe or toe end 6718 and the heel or heel end 6722, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6770A, B, D, E near the toe or toe end 6718 and the heel or heel end 6722. The aforementioned weight 6782 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 6734 of the club head 6710. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6782 is positioned on the feature 6770E and/or 6770D near the heel or heel end 6722, while lighter weights 6782 are positioned on the feature 6270A, B near the toe or toe end 6718 and on the feature 6770C that is located between the toe or toe end 6318 and the heel or heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 6782 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6722 of the club head 6710. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6782 is positioned on the feature 6770A and/or 6770B near the toe or toe end 6718, while lighter weights 6782 are positioned on the features 6270D, E near the heel or heel end 6722 and on the feature 6770C that is located between the toe or toe end 6718 and the heel or heel end 6722. The aforementioned weight 6782 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 6718 of the club head 6710. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6770A, B, C, D, E are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6770A, B, C, D, E. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6770A, B, C, D, E can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 6770A, B, C, D, E has its own corresponding weight 6782 or set of weights 6782. Further, because the features 6770 A, B, C, D, E are spaced away from the sole towards the strike face, adjusting the weights 6782 can also affect the spin imparted on the ball after impact.
The adjustable weighting system 6766 of golf club head 6710 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6766 of golf club head 6710 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 6710 having the adjustable weighting system 6766 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
The recessed portion 11081 includes a depth measured as the distance from the recessed surface 11081 to the sole 11030 in a direction parallel to the recessed surface 11081. In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 11080 has a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 11080 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 11018 to the heel end 11022. Thus, when a weight 11082 is coupled to the club head 11010 in one region of the recessed portion 11080, the weight 11082 may be concealed by the wall 11083 and flush with the sole 11030. When the weight 11082 is coupled to the club head 11010 in a different region of the recessed portion 11080, a portion of the weight 11082 may protrude outward from the wall 11083. As illustrated in
In many embodiments, the recessed portion 11080 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 11066 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 11080 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 11080 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 11080 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the recessed portion 11080 includes a width measured as the distance between the first wall 11083 and the trailing edge 11072 or second wall 11084. In the illustrated embodiments, the recessed portion 11080 includes a varying width. In some embodiments, the first region 11077 has an increasing width from the toe end 11018 towards the center or third region 11078, the second region 11076 comprises an increasing width from the heel end 11022 towards the center and or third region 11078, and the third region 11078 comprises a constant width which is smaller than the average width of the first and or second regions 11077, 11076. In other embodiments as illustrated in
Referring again to
As illustrated, the features 11070A, B, C are disposed within the recessed portion 11080 along the recessed surface 11081 such that one or more weights 11082 may be releasably or removably coupled to the club head 11010 along the recessed portion 11080. More specifically, a first feature 11070A is positioned along the first region 11077 of the recessed portion 11080 near the toe end 11018, a second feature 11070C is positioned along the second region 11076 of the recessed portion near the heel end 11022, and a third feature 11070B is positioned along a third region 11078 of the recessed portion 11080 between the toe and heel end 11018, 11022. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 11070A, B, C can be positioned on the first wall 11083, second wall 11084, and/or the recessed surface 11081 of the recessed portion 11080.
With continued reference to
In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 11082 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 11082 that are sized and configured to receive a threaded fastener or screw fastener 11085. The screw fastener 11085 can be threaded through the weight 11082 into the corresponding feature 11070A, B, C, thus securing the weight 11082 to the recessed portion 11080. In some embodiments, the weight 11082 can comprise a recessed or inset portion for receiving the top portion of the screw fastener 11085, and therefore the screw fastener 11085 can sit flush with an outer portion of the weight 11082. In other embodiments, the weights 11082 can be configured to be couple to the features 11070 A, B, C through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In embodiments where the adjustable weight system 11066 comprises more than one weight 11082, each of the weights 11082 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 11082 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 11082 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 11082 can comprise different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 11082 can comprise a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 11082 can comprise a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 11082 can comprise the same or different material and can have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 11082 can have a greater volume than the remaining weights 11082. In some embodiments, each of the weights 11082 can vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 11082 can vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 11082 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 11070A, B, C.
In some embodiments, the weights 11082 can vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 11082, one or more of the weights 82 can vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 11082 can vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 11082 can vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 11082 can vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 11082 can vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 11082 can vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 11082 can vary between 10-20 g, and a third weight 11082 can vary between 20-30 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 11082 can vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 11082 can vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 11082 can vary between 40-50 g, a second weight 11082 can vary between 30-40 g, and a third weight can vary between 20-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 11082 can vary between 1-10 g, and a third 11082 can vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 11082 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 11082 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 11082 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 11082 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 11082 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 11082 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, the first weight can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 11082 may be strategically positioned on the features 11070A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 11010 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 11082 is positioned on the feature 11070B, located between the toe end 11018 and the heel end 11022, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 11070A, and C at the toe end 11018 and the heel end 11022. The aforementioned weight 11082 positions results in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 11034 of the club head 11010. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 11082 can be positioned on the feature 11070C at the heel end 11022, while lighter weights 11082 are positioned on the feature 6270A, and B near the toe end 11018 and at the center located between the toe end 6318 and the heel end 6322. The aforementioned weight 11082 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 11022 of the club head 11010. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 11082 is positioned on the feature 11070A at the toe or toe end 11018, while lighter weights 11082 are positioned on the features 6270C at the heel end 11022 and on the feature 11070B that is located between the toe end 11018 and the heel end 11022. The aforementioned weight 11082 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 11018 of the club head 11010. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 11070A, B, C can be of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 11070A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 11070A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 11070A, B, C can have its own corresponding weight 11082 or set of weights 11082. Further, adjustment of the position of the weights 11082 on the features 11070 A, B, C can also effect the spin imparted on the ball after impact.
Referring to
The adjustable weighting system 11066 of golf club head 11010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 11066 of golf club head 11010 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 11010 having the adjustable weighting system 11066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
In some embodiments, the recessed portion 12080 defines a groove, channel, and/or recessed track that extends within and along the skirt or trailing edge 12072 or rear perimeter 10136, and extends generally in an arcuate configuration from the toe or toe end 12018 to the heel or heel end 12020. The channel 12013 is defined by a first surface 12073 (
The channel 12013 includes a depth measured from the third surface 12075 to the sole 12030 in a direction perpendicular to the third surface 12075. In the illustrated embodiment, the channel 12013 can have a varying depth such that it is deeper in some areas than in other areas (e.g., may have a continuously or intermittently changing depth). In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 12013 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant depth along its length from the toe end 12018 to the heel end 12022. Thus, when a weight 12082 is coupled to the club head 12010 in one region of the channel 12013, the weight 12082 can fit flush in the channel 12013 and/or be concealed by the first and/or second surfaces 12073, 12074. When the weight 12082 is coupled to the club head 12010 in a different region of the channel 12013, a portion of the weight 12082 can protrude beyond the first and/or second surfaces 12073, 12074. In other embodiments, the weight 12082 can be recessed within the channel 12013, sit flush within the channel 12013, or protrude beyond the channel 12013 in any position.
As illustrated in
In some embodiments, the first region 12077 (and similarly the second region 12076) of the channel 12013 can have a shallow depth, such that a portion of the weight 12082 protrudes out past the first surface 12073 and the second surface 12074 when the weight 12082 is coupled to the first region 12077. However, due to the end surfaces 12079, the weight 12082 can appear flush to the rest of the sole 12030, toe end 12018, or heel end 12022 of the club head 12010. In contrast, the third region 12078 can have a larger depth, such that the weight 12082 is concealed by the first surface 12073 and the second surface 12074 (e.g., as viewed along the y-axis 58 in
In many embodiments, the channel 12013 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 12066 remains low profile. For example, in some embodiments, the channel 12013 has a maximum depth of 0.25 inches. In other embodiments, the channel 12013 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the channel 12013 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches. Additionally, the channel 12013 includes a width measured as the distance between the first surface 12073 and the second surface 12074. In the illustrated embodiments, the channel 12013 includes a constant width. In other embodiments, the channel 12013 can have an increasing, decreasing and/or constant width. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 2.0, 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
For the purposes of this example, in the illustrated embodiment, the features 12070 A, B, C can be apertures configured to receive a screw. The screw can be comprised of a material having density, which is the same or less than the density of the club head 12010. As illustrated, the features 12070 A, B, C are disposed within the channel 12013 along the third surface 12075 such that one or more weights 12082 may be releasably or removably coupled to the club head 12010 along the channel 12013. More specifically, a first feature 12070A is positioned along the first region 12077 of the channel 12013 near the toe end 12018, a second feature 12070C is positioned along the second region 12076 of the channel 12013 near the heel end 12022, and a third feature 12070B is positioned along a third region 12078 of the channel 12013 between the toe and heel end 12018, 12022. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 12070A, B, C can be positioned on the first wall 12083, second wall 12084, and/or the recessed surface 12081 of the recessed portion 11080.
With continued reference to
In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 12082 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 12082 that are sized and configured to receive a threaded fastener or screw (not shown). The screw can be threaded through the weight 12082 into the corresponding feature 12070A, B, C, thus securing the weight 12082 to the channel 12013. In some embodiments, the weight 12082 can comprise a recessed or inset portion for receiving the top portion of the screw and therefore the screw can sit flush with the outer portion of the weight 12082. In other embodiments, the weight 12082 can comprise a blind aperture not extending entirely through the weight 12082. In other embodiments, the weight 12082 can be devoid of an aperture. In other embodiments, the weights 12082 can be configured to be couple to the features 12070 A, B, C through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
Referring again to
In the illustrated embodiment, each of the weights 12082 is illustrated having the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 12082 can vary in shape and size, resulting in different weights 12082 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 12082 can comprise different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 12082 can comprise a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 12082 can comprise a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 12082 can comprise the same or different material and can have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 12082 can comprise a greater volume than the remaining weights 12082. In some embodiments, each of the weights 12082 can vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 12082 can vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 12082 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 12070A, B, C.
In some embodiments, the weights 12082 can vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 12082, one or more of the weights 12082 can vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 12082 can vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 12082 can vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 12082 can vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 12082 can vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 12082 can vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 12082 can vary between 10-20 g, a third weight 12082 can vary between 20-30, a fourth weight 82 can vary between 30-40 g, and a fifth weight 12082 can vary between 40-50 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 12082 can vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 12082 can vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 12082 can vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 12082, can vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 12082 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 12082 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 12082 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 12082 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 12082 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 12082 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second, third, fourth, fifth weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, or 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights can have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
The weights 12082 may be strategically positioned on the features 12070A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 12010 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/toe bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 12082 is positioned on the feature 12070B, located between the toe or toe end 12018 and the heel or heel end 12022, while lighter weights, or no weights, are positioned on the features 12070A, C near the toe or toe end 12018 and the heel or heel end 12022. The aforementioned weight 12082 placement can result in the center of gravity remaining centered while being shifted towards the back end 12034 of the club head 12010. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 12082 is positioned on the features 12070C near the heel or heel end 12022, while lighter weights 12082, or no weights, are positioned on the feature 12070A near the toe or toe end 12018 and on the feature 12070B that is located between the toe or toe end 12018 and the heel or heel end 12022. The aforementioned weight 12082 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 12022 of the club head 12010. In some embodiments, a heavier weight 12082 is positioned on the feature 12070A near the toe or toe end 12018, while lighter weights 12082, or no weights, are positioned on the feature 12070C near the heel or heel end 12022 and on the feature 12070B that is located between the toe or toe end 12018 and the heel or heel end 12022. The aforementioned weight 12082 placement can result in the center of gravity being shifted towards the toe end 12018 of the club head 12010. In many embodiments, one or more of the features 12070A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 12070A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 12070A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each feature 12070A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 12082 or set of weights 12082.
The adjustable weighting system 12066 of golf club head 12010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 12066 of golf club head 12010 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 12010 having the adjustable weighting system 12066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
Referring to
Referring again to
As illustrated in
The recessed portion 6881 includes a depth measured as the distance from the recessed surface 6881 to the sole 6830 in a direction perpendicular to the recessed surface 6881. In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 6880 has a constant depth. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 6880 can have an increasing, decreasing, varying, and/or constant depth along its length from the back end 6834 to the sole center 6832, and/or from the sole center 6832 to the heel end 6822.
In many embodiments, the recessed portion 6881 has a shallow depth ensuring the adjustable weight system 6866 remains low in profile. The recessed portion 6881 can have an increasing, decreasing, varying, and/or constant the depth between the first region 6877 and the second region 6876, and/or between the second region 6876 and the third region 6878. For example, in some embodiments, the recessed portion 6880 has a maximum depth of 0.50 inches. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 6880 can have a maximum depth of 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, 0.2, or 0.1 inches. In other embodiments, the depth of the recessed portion 6880 can vary within the range of 0.05 to 0.25, 0.1 to 0.4, 0.1 to 0.6, 0.1 to 0.8, 0.2 to 0.4, 0.2 to 0.6, 0.2 to 0.8, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.3 to 0.9, 0.4 to 0.8, 0.4 to 1.2, 0.5 to 1.0, 0.5 to 1.5, or 1.0 to 1.5 inches.
Further, the recessed portion 6880 includes a cross sectional shape and a cross sectional area. In some embodiments, the cross sectional shape of the channel 6813 can comprise a cylindrical shape, a circular shape, a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a polygonal shape, or a trapezoidal shape. The recessed portion 6880 can have a varying and/or constant cross sectional shape between the first region 6877 and the second region 6876, and/or between the second region 6876 and the third region 6878. The recessed portion 6880 can have an increasing, decreasing, varying, and/or constant cross sectional area between the first region 6877 and the second region 6876, and/or between the second region 6876 and the third region 6878.
Additionally, the recessed portion 6880 includes a width measured as the distance between the first wall 6883 and second wall 6884. In some embodiments, the width between the first region 6877 and the second region 6876 is different from the width between the second region 6876 and the third region 6878. In some embodiments, the width between the first region 6877 and the second region 6876 is greater than the width between the second region 6876 and the third region 6878. In other embodiments, the width between the first region 6877 and the second region 6876 is less than the width between the second region 6876 and the third region 6878. In other embodiments, the recessed portion 6880 can have an increasing, decreasing, varying, and/or constant width between the first region 6877 and the second region 6876, and/or between the second region 6876 and the third region 6878. In many embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0 inches. For example, in some embodiments, the width can be less than 2.0, 1.75, 1.5, 1.25, 1.0, 0.9, 0.8, 0.7, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3, or 0.2 inches. In other embodiments, the width can vary between 0.1 to 0.5, 0.3 to 0.7, 0.5 to 0.9, 0.7 to 1.1, 0.9 to 1.3, 1.1 to 1.5, 1.3 to 1.7, or 1.5 to 2.0 inches.
Referring again to
As illustrated, the features 6870A, B, C are disposed within the recessed portion 6880 along the recessed surface 6881 such that one or more weights 6882 may be removably or releasably coupled to the club head 6810 along the recessed portion 6880. More specifically, a first feature 6870A is positioned at the first region 6877 of the recessed portion 6880 near the back end 6834, a second feature 6870B is positioned at the second region 6876 of the recessed portion near the sole center 6832, a third feature 6870C is positioned at a third region 6878 of the recessed portion 6880 near the heel end 6822. In other embodiments, one or more of the features 6870A, B, C can be positioned on the first wall 6883, the second wall 6884, and/or the recessed surface 6881 of the recessed portion 6880.
With continued reference to
In the illustrated embodiment, the weights 6882 comprise apertures extending entirely through the weight 6882 that are sized and configured to receive a threaded fastener or screw fastener 6885. The screw fastener 6885 can be threaded through the weight 6882 into the corresponding feature 6870A, B, C thus securing the weight 6882 to the recessed portion 6880. In some embodiments, the weight 6882 can comprise a recessed or inset portion for receiving the top portion of the screw fastener 6885 and therefore the screw fastener 6885 can sit flush with the outer portion of the weight 6882. In other embodiments, the weights 6882 can be configured to be couple to the features 6870A, B, C through a friction fit, a snap-fit mechanism, with a set-screw, or with any other suitable structure.
In embodiments where the adjustable weight system 6866 comprises more than one weight 6882, each of the weights 6882 can have the same shape and size. In other embodiments, the weights 6882 can vary in shape and size, resulting in weights 6882 having varying masses. Further, in some embodiments, the weights 6882 are made of different materials such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6882 may be made of a high density material, such as tungsten, and the remaining weights 6882 may be made of a less dense material, such as polyurethane or another plastic. In other embodiments, the weights 6882 can comprise the same or different materials and can have different sizes or volumes such that they vary in mass. For example, one weight 6882 may have a greater volume than the remaining weights 6882. In some embodiments, each of the weights 6882 may vary in volume from one another and thus vary in mass. In some embodiments, the weights 6882 may vary in both volume and material from one another. In some embodiments, one of the structures labeled as 6882 is not a weight, but rather a light-weight (e.g., light-weight plastic) cover that snap-fits or otherwise couples to one of the features 6870A, B, C.
In some embodiments, the weights 6882 may vary between 0.1-50 g. For example, in embodiments having a plurality of weights 6882, one or more of the weights 6882 may vary between 0-10 g, one or more of the weights 6882 may vary between 10-20 g, one or more of the weights 6882 may vary between 20-30, one or more of the weights 6882 may vary between 30-40 g, and one or more of the weights 6882 may vary between 40-50 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6882 may vary between 0-10 g, a second weight 6882 may vary between 10-20 g, and a third weight 6882 may vary between 20-30 g. In other embodiments, a first weight 6882 may vary between 1-5 g, and a second and third weight 6882 may vary between 5-30 g. In other embodiments, a first and second weight 6882 may vary between 1-10 g, and a third and fourth weight 6882, may vary between 5-25 g. In some embodiments, a first weight 6882 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6882 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6882 has a mass of 12 grams, and a second and third weight 6882 each have a mass of 1.5 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight 6882 has a mass of 8.5 grams, and a second and third weight 6882 each have a mass of 0.75 grams. In other embodiments, a first weight can have a mass of 10-20 g, 10-25 g, or 15-25 g, and the remaining weight (e.g. second and third weight) can have a mass of 0.25-2.5 g, 0.25-5 g, 0.25-7.5 g, 0.25 to 10 g. In other embodiments, a first weight, can have a mass of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 or 30 grams and the remaining weights can have a mass of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 grams. In other embodiments, any number of weights may have the same mass or may have a varying mass between 0.1-50 g.
With continued reference to
The weights 6882 may be strategically positioned on the features 6870A, B, C to achieve a desired club head 6810 center of gravity position and/or moment of inertia and/or heel/back bias. For example, in some embodiments, a heavier weight 6882 is positioned on the feature 6870A, located near the back end 6834, while lighter weights are positioned on the features 6870B, C near the sole center 6832 and the heel end 6822. The aforementioned weight 6882 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the back end 6834 of the club head 6810.
In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6882 is positioned on the feature 6870C near the heel end 6822, while lighter weights 6882 are positioned on the feature 6270A near the back end 6834 and 6870B located near the sole center 6832. The aforementioned weight 6882 positions results in the center of gravity being shifted towards the heel end 6822 of the club head 6810.
In some embodiments, a heavier weight 6882 is positioned on the feature 6870B located at the sole center 6832, while lighter weights 6882 are positioned on the feature 6870A near the back end 6834 and on the feature 6870C near the heel end 6822. The aforementioned weight 6882 positions results in the center of gravity being centered on the club head 6810.
In many embodiments, one or more of the features 6870A, B, C are of equal size and shape, such that one weight may be interchangeably used with each of the features 6870A, B, C. In some embodiments, one or more of the features 6870A, B, C can have a differing size and shape, such that each features 6870A, B, C has its own corresponding weight 6882 or set of weights 6882. Further, adjustment of the position of the weights 6882 on the features 6870A, B, C can also effect the spin imparted on the ball after impact.
The adjustable weighting system 6866 of golf club head 6810 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 6866 of golf club head 6810 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights.
The adjustable weighting system 13066 is positioned on a sole 13030 of the club head 13010. As illustrated in
In many embodiment, the wall 13083 can include a first wall portion 13089 located toward the strike face 38 of the club head 13010, a second wall portion 13090 located opposite the first wall portion 13089 and toward a rear end 13023 of the club head 13010, a first end wall 13091 located toward the toe end 13018 of the club head 13010, and a second end wall 13092 located opposite the first end wall 13091 and toward the heel end 13022 of the club head 13010. Generally, the recessed surface 13081 extends substantially parallel to the sole 13030 of the club head 13010, while the first and second wall portions 13083, 13084 and the first and second end walls 13091, 13092 generally extend substantially perpendicular to the recessed surface 13081 and/or the sole 13030. In other embodiments, the first and second wall portions 13083, 13084 and/or the first and second end walls 13091, 13092 can extend at a non-perpendicular angle between the recessed surface 13081 and the sole 13030.
In many embodiments as illustrated in
In the illustrated embodiment, the recessed portion 13080 can further comprise a plurality of discrete attachment locations. The plurality of discrete attachment locations can comprise various features 13070 including protruding bodies, apertures, recesses or ports capable of receiving a fastener, notches or tabs or cutout regions, ribs or grooves, pegs, hooks, magnets, programmable magnets, or any other suitable attachment means. The features 13070 define discrete attachment locations for securing one or more weights 13082 to the club head 13010. The club head 13010 having one or more discrete attachment locations is different than other adjustable weighting systems, wherein the weight can be coupled at any, or at an infinite, or at an unlimited number of locations across the club head. In the illustrated embodiment, the features 13070 are straight wall-like protrusions or ribs 13070 extending from the recessed portion 13080, generally perpendicular relative to the strike face 38. In other embodiments, the features 13070 can be protrusions extending from the recessed portion 13080 at any angle, and in any shape (e.g., circular pegs, hourglass-shape pegs, square pegs, etc.)
As illustrated in
The weights 13082 are configured to be received by the features 13070 within the recessed portion 13080. The weights 13082 each have a general cross-sectional shape and size (e.g., cylindrical, cubicle, rectangular, trapezoidal, etc.) corresponding to the cross sectional shape of the recessed portion 13080. As illustrated in
The weights 13082 can further comprise a through hole 13071 configured to house the cable 13069 of the adjustable weighting system 13066. The through hole 13071 can extend through the weight 13082 in a direction from the heel end 13022 to the toe end 13018 of the club head 13010 when the weight 13082 is positioned within the recessed portion 13080. When assembled the through hole 13071 is parallel to the recessed surface 13081. In other embodiments, the weights 13082 can be devoid of the through hole 13071. In these or other embodiments, the weights 13082 can comprise a groove (not pictured) positioned on a top surface of the weights 13082, configured to receive the cable 13069.
The weights 13082 further comprise a mass. The mass of the weights 13082 can range from 3 grams to 35 grams, 3 grams to 12 grams, 5 grams to 18 grams, 8 grams to 23 grams, 12 grams to 25 grams, 18 grams to 27 grams, 20 grams to 30 grams, 25 grams to 33 grams, or 28 grams to 35 grams. For example, the weights 13082 can be 1 gram, 2 grams, 3 grams, 6 grams, 9 grams, 12 grams, 15 grams, 18 grams, 21 grams, 24 grams, 27 grams, 30 grams, 33 grams, or 35 grams. In embodiments wherein the club head 13010 comprises multiple weights 13082, the weights 13082 can all comprise the same mass, or all have different masses. For example, the club head 13010 comprises three weights 13082 with the first weight 13082 having a mass of 12 grams, and both the second and third weights 13082 having a mass of 5 grams. In another example, the club head 13010 comprises five weights 13082 with the first weight 13082 having a mass of 20 grams, the second weight 13082 having a mass of 15 grams, the third weight 13082 having a mass of 10 grams, the fourth weight 13082 having a mass of 7 grams, and the fifth weight 1082 having a mass of 3 grams.
The adjustable weighting system 13066 comprising the tensioner 13067 and the cable 13069 is configured to couple the weights 13082 to the club head 13010. The tensioner 13067 of the adjustable weighting system 13066 comprises a fastener 13067A and a washer 13067B. In some embodiments as illustrated in
As illustrated in
The cable 13069 of the adjustable weighting system 13066 is configured to be received by the tensioner 13067, and positioned within the recessed portion 13080. The cable 13069 can be coupled to the tensioner 13067 via the notch 13068 of the fastener 13067A and washer 13067B, wherein the washer 13067B then rotates to secure the cable 13069 within the fastener 13067A. An end of the cable 13069 comprises a width greater than a width of the notch 13068, which prevents the cable 13069 from dislodging from the fastener 13067A when tension is applied to the cable 13069. In some embodiments, the adjustable weighting system 13066 comprises one tensioner 13067, wherein one end of the cable 13069 is configured to be coupled to the tensioner 13067, and the other end of the cable 13069 is configured to be attached/fixed at an opposite end of the club head 13010 from the tensioner 13067. In other embodiments, the adjustable weighting system comprises two tensioners 13067, wherein one end of the cable 13069 can be configured to couple to a first tensioner 13067, and the other end of the cable 13069 can be configured to couple to the second tensioner 13067. For example, as illustrated in
The cable 13069 can be a metallic material (e.g., steel wire rope, aluminum wire rope, copper wire rope, tungsten wire rope, nickel wire rope, silver wire rope, or any other metallic wire rope), or a non-metallic material such as a fiber, a polymer, a plastic, or a composite type rope. For example, the cable 13069 can comprise baling twine, parachute cord material, nylon, Kevlar, polymer tweed, steel wire with polymer coating, any metallic wire with polymer coating, high modulus polyethylene fiber, polycarbonate, polyoxymethylene, and/or nylon with polyamide.
The tensioner 13067, when received within the aperture 13085 of sole 13030, can be rotated (i.e., twisted) to adjust the tension in the cable 13069. The notch 13068 of the tensioner 13067 allows the cable 13069 to couple to the tensioner 13067 in such a way that when the tensioner 13067 rotates, the cabled 13069 remains stationary, and does not rotate with the tensioner 13067. The washer 13067B of the tensioner 13067 acts as a stop within the aperture 13085, preventing the fastener 13067A of the tensioner 13067 from moving within the aperture 13085 during a swing and/or impact. When the tensioner 13067 is rotated clockwise, the tensioner 13067 recedes deeper into the aperture 13085, and the cable is loosened. With the cable 13069 loosened, the weight 13082 can be lifted from the feature 13070 within the recessed portion 13080, and moved (or the weight 13082 having the through hole 13071 can slide along the cable 13069) to another feature 13070. Further, when the cable 13069 is loosened, additional weights 13082 comprising grooves (not pictured) can be positioned onto the features 13070 and under the cable 13069 to increase weight. Repositioning the weights 13082 reconfigures the CG of the club head 13010. For example, the weight 13082 can be repositioned from the first feature 13070A near the toe end 13018 to the second feature 13070E near the heel end 13022, wherein the CG shift toward the heel end 13022 helps correct ball trajectory for players who tend to slice the ball and/or generate a draw. In other embodiments, the cable 13069 can be loosened by other means other than by the tensioner 13067.
The tensioner 13067 can be rotated (i.e., twisted) counterclockwise to tighten the tension within the cable 13069, wherein the washer 13067B prevents the fastener 13067A of the tensioner 13067 from moving within the aperture 13085. When the tensioner 13067 is rotated counterclockwise, the tensioner 13067 positioned in the aperture 13085 extends outward toward the outer surface 13074 of the sole 13030, wherein the tensioner 13067 is flush with the outer surface 13074 to indicate the cable 13069 reached maximum tension. As illustrated in
The club head 13010 having the adjustable weighting system 13066 comprising the tensioner 13067 (or other cable adjustment means) and the cable 13069 described above can optimize the performance of the golf club. The adjustable weighting system 13066 allows for the club head 13010 to adjust the weight of a low center of gravity club head about the x-axis (heel-to-toe end) without having to sacrifice a high moment of inertia (MOI), similar to that of a club head devoid of an adjustable weight system. Shifting the CG about the x-axis allows players to correct a slice or a hook in ball trajectory.
The club head 13010 having the adjustable weight system 13066 with the tensioner 13067 and the cable 13069 further has a utility regarding ease of manufacturing, compared to club heads with more complex structures to house a weight (e.g., deep weight ports, multiple weight ports, rail systems, weight covers/caps). The weight(s) 13082 coupled to the club head body 13014 are secured by the tension of the cable 13069, which creates a force on the weight(s) 13082 onto the feature(s) 13070 of the club head 13010. The tension produced force eliminates the need for the club head 13010 to be manufactured with a weight housing structure having complex internal/external geometries in order to secure the weight(s) 13082. Accordingly, the material and mass associated with the complex weight housing structure can be reduced. The mass saved using the low profile adjustable weighting system can then be positioned elsewhere on the club head to increase strength and/or MOI, and to improve CG positioning. The tension created force of the cable 13069 further eliminates the need for screw-type fasteners, thus the weight(s) 13082 and the club head 13010 do not require manufacturing a threaded aperture and receiving geometry to receive the fastener. The lack of the fastener and threaded aperture reduces the cost of manufacturing and improves the ease of production.
Further, the cable 13069 of the adjustable weighting system 13066 is lightweight, strong, and can be incorporated in a number of different patterns on recessed portion 13080 of the club head 13010. The different patterns allow for the weight(s) 13082 to be place in a number of different locations on the sole 13030 because the weight(s) 13082 are not limited to specific weight housing structures. The number of different weight positions can help fine tune the CG placement to adjust the ball spin and trajectory for individual players. The cable 13069 can further be strategically placed in such a pattern that the cable can reinforce specific locations on the club head 13010. The material and pattern of the cable 13069 can further act as a sound dampener and absorb vibrations experienced by the club head 13010 during impact, thereby reducing unwanted sound, and unwanted stress during a game.
The adjustable weighting system 13066 of golf club head 13010 maintains or prevents a significant reduction in club head moment of inertia, and low and back club head center of gravity positioning, compared to a club head devoid of an adjustable weighting system. The adjustable weighting system 13066 of golf club head 13010 maintains a high club head moment of inertia and a low and back club head CG position due to the low profile of the weighting system and the perimeter positioning of the one or more weights. The club head 13010 having the adjustable weighting system 13066 can have similar or identical parameters and measurements as club head 100 described above.
In some embodiments, one or more of the other adjustable weights described herein (e.g., weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082)) are positioned at a minimum distance from a center of gravity (CG) of their associated club head ranging from approximately 1.0 inches to 2.6 inches (e.g. approximately 1.0 inches, approximately 1.2 inches, approximately 1.4 inches, approximately 1.6 inches, approximately 1.8 inches, approximately 2.0 inches, approximately 2.2 inches, approximately 2.4 inches, or approximately 2.6 inches). In some embodiments, one or more of the other adjustable weights described herein (e.g., weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082)) are also positioned within a maximum distance of approximately 0.450 inches to approximately 0.550 inches inward from a perimeter of their associated club head when viewed from a top or side view (e.g., the maximum distance from the perimeter can be approximately 0.450 inches, approximately 0.460 inches, approximately 0.470 inches approximately 0.480 inches approximately 0.490 inches approximately 0.500 inches approximately 0.510 inches approximately 0.520 inches approximately 0.530 inches approximately 0.540 inches, or approximately 0.550 inches). Other embodiments include different values and ranges.
In some embodiments, the weight or weights described herein (e.g., 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5882, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082)) are made at least partially of a high density metal, metal alloy or any other material (e.g., plastic or composite with high density metal beads or powder). In some embodiments, the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082) are made at least partially of steel, tungsten, aluminum, titanium, vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, other metals, metal alloys, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments the cable or cables described herein (e.g., 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3669, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, 4469, 4569, 4669, 4769, 4869, 4969, and/or 13069) are made of metal, although other embodiments include different materials for the weights and the cables described herein.
In some embodiments, one or more of the cable or cables 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3569, 3669, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, 4469, 4569, 4669, 4769, 4869, and/or 4969 described above is a wire, a high modulus polyethylene fiber, a polycarbonate material, a polyoxymethylene material, and/or a nylon material with polyamide.
In many embodiments, the cable 13069 can comprise a thickness between 0.020 inch and 0.125 inch. For example, in some embodiments, the thickness of the cable or cables described herein (e.g., 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3669, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, 4469, 4569, 4669, 4769, 4869, 4969, and/or 13069) can be between 0.021 inch and 0.041 inch, between 0.037 inch and 0.057 inch, between 0.053 inch and 0.073 inch, between 0.068 inch and 0.088 inch, between 0.084 inch and 0.104 inch, between 0.099 inch and 0.119 inch, or between 0.115 inch and 0.135 inch.
In some embodiments, the cable or cables described herein (e.g., 3269, 3369, 3469, 3569, 3669, 3769, 3869, 3969, 4069, 4169, 4469, 4569, 4669, 4769, 4869, 4969, and/or 13069) can withstand a tensile load up to 1500 Newtons (N). For example, in many embodiments, the cable can withstand a tensile load between 200 N and 1500 N. For example, in some embodiments, cable can withstand a tensile load up to 200 N, up to 300 N, up to 400 N, up to 500 N, up to 600 N, up to 700 N, up to 800 N, up to 900 N, up to 1000 N, up to 1100 N, up to 1200 N, up to 1300 N, up to 1400 N, or up to 1500 N. Other embodiments can include different range and values.
In some embodiments, one or more of the tensioners described herein (e.g., 3267, 3367, 3467, 3567, 3667, 3767, 3867, 3967, 4067, 4167, 4467, 4567, 4667, 4767, and/or 13067) is pushed down (i.e., toward the club head) to engage the tensioner. The tensioner is then turned in one direction (e.g., clockwise) to tension the cable or cables. To release tension, the tensioner is pulled up (i.e., away from the club head). In some embodiments, a force of at least 2 lb is required to pull the tensioner back up to loosen the cable or cables, although other embodiments include different values and ranges (e.g., at least 4 lb, 6 lb, 8 lb, 10 lb, 12 lb, 15 lb, 20 lb etc.). In some embodiments, the rotation of the tensioner in a loosening direction (e.g., counterclockwise) may be limited to prevent over-rotation of the tensioner and to prevent tangling or unwanted spooling of the cable or cables. The rotation of the tensioner in the tightening direction (e.g., clockwise) may also be limited. The tensioners described above may also be of a particular size or range of size. For example, in some embodiments, each tensioner may have a diameter of less than 2 inches, less than 1 inch, less than 0.5 inch, etc. Various other ranges and values are also possible. In some embodiments, the cable has a diameter less than 0.5 inches, less than 0.25 inches, less than 0.10 inches, or other values and ranges. In some embodiments, a separate adjustment tool is used to adjust the tensioner (e.g., to rotate or otherwise move the tensioner) and adjust tension in the cables.
In some embodiments, one or more of the club heads described herein may include more than one tensioner. For example, in some embodiments one of the club heads 3210, 3310, 3410, 3510, 3610, 3710, 3810, 3910, 4010, 4110, 4410, 4510, 4610, 4710, and/or 13010 may include two or more tensioners (e.g., along a single recessed portion or separate recessed portions of the club head) that are each coupled to one or more cables. In some embodiments, one tensioner tensions a first set of cables to hold a weight or weights against the club head, and another tensioner tensions a second set of cables to hold a weight or weights against the club head.
While some of the embodiments described herein include a single cable, whereas other embodiments include multiple cables, any of the embodiments described herein may include a single or multiple cables associated with one or more tensioners.
While some of the embodiments described herein include a single channel that guides a cable and/or provides a feature or features for positioning a weight or weights, and other embodiments described above include a distinct network of channels that guide one or more cables and/or provide features for positioning one or more weights, any of the embodiments described herein may include a single channel or network of channels. Additionally, while certain networks of channels are illustrated, any of the club heads described herein may include any arrangement, pattern, or size of channels.
While various grooves (e.g., 3271, 3371, 3571, 3671, 3771, 3871) in the weights are described above and illustrated, other embodiments include different numbers, sizes, and shapes of grooves to accommodate a cable. For example, in some embodiments, one or more of the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4982, and/or 13082 includes a groove or track that has a C-shaped contour (as opposed to a U-shaped or V-shaped contour), such that the cable or cables may “snap” into the groove and generally be held in place the groove, while still allowing the weight to slide along the cable. In some embodiments, one or more of the channels for the cable or cables has a C-shaped (or other shape) contour or track (as opposed to a U-shaped or V-shaped contour), such that the cable or cables may “snap” into the channel and generally be held in place in the channel, while still allowing the cable to move within the channel. In some embodiments, the channels include tracks or other contours that hold or restrain the cables, for example as the channels curve along the club head body, such that the cables do not come out of the channels during tensioning of the cables.
In some embodiments, one or more of the weights described herein (e.g., 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082)) is attracted to the club head 3210, 3310, 3410, 3510, 3610, 3710, 3810, 3910, 4010, 4110, 4210, 4310, 4410, 4510, 4610, 4710, 4810, 4910, 5010, 5110, 5210, 5310, 5410, 5510, 5610, 5710, 5810, 5910, 6010, 6110, 6210, 6310, 6410, 6510, 6610, 6710, 6810, 11010, 12010, and/or 13010 via a magnetic force, such that the weight or weights are held against the club head at least partially by the magnetic force. For example, in some embodiments one or more of the features 3270, 3370, 3470, 3570, 3670, 3770, 3870, 3970, 4070, 4170, 4270, 4370, 4470, 4570, 4670, 4870, 4970, 5070, 5170, 5270, 5370, 5470, 5570, 5670, 5770, 5870, 5970, 6070, 6170, 6270, 6370, 6470, 6570, 6670, 6770, 6870, 11070, 12070, and/or 13070 is a protruding body or notch that is comprised at least partially of a metallic material, and one or more of the weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082 is comprised at least partially of a magnetic material. The weight or weights may be held in place at least partially by the magnetic attractive force between the magnet or magnets and the feature or features, as well as by one or more tensioners and cables as described herein, or by one or more of the other structures described herein (e.g., threaded protruding post, ribs, etc.) In some embodiments, the weight or weights snap into place over a protruding body or into a notch, and are held against the club head at least partially by a frictional force, as well as by the magnetic force. In some embodiments, the weight or weights are held in place solely by the magnetic force. In some embodiments, the weight or weights may be slid along the cable or cables described herein until the weight or weights magnetically snap onto or into a different protruding body or notch. In yet other embodiments, one or more of the weight or weights 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082 is comprised at least partially of the metallic material, and one or more of the features 3270, 3370, 3470, 3570, 3670, 3770, 3870, 3970, 4070, 4170, 4270, 4370, 4470, 4570, 4670, 4870, 4970, 5070, 5170, 5270, 5370, 5470, 5570, 5670, 5770, 5870, 5970, 6070, 6170, 6270, 6370, 6470, 6570, 6670, 6770, 6870, 11070, 12070, and/or 13070 is comprised at least partially of the magnetic material.
In some embodiments, one or more of the weights described herein (e.g., 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, and/or 13082) is pressed against and held to the club head 3210, 3310, 3410, 3510, 3610, 3710, 3810, 3910, 4010, 4110, 4210, 4310, 4410, 4510, 4610, 4710, 4810, 4910, 5010, 5110, 5210, 5310, 5410, 5510, 5610, 5710, 5810, 5910, 6010, 6110, 6210, 6310, 6410, 6510, 6610, 6710, and/or 13010 via tension alone in a cable or cables. Thus, at least in some embodiments, the club head does not include separates notches or protrusions or other features that are sized and shaped to accommodate a single weight. Rather, the club head includes a larger surface (e.g., a recessed surface) and a tensioner and one or more cables that are coupled to (e.g., pressed against) one or more of the weights. The tension of the cable or cables alone via activation of the tensioner is sufficient to hold the weight or weights against the club head in a desired position or location. When the tension is released in the tensioner, the weight or weights may then be moved to a different location along the surface.
In some embodiments, one or more of the weights described herein (e.g., 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082) includes a rail or rails (e.g., a T-shaped rail, etc.) along a portion of the weight. Additionally, one or more channels (e.g., a network of channels) are formed in the club head that are sized and shaped to receive the rails, such that the weight or weights may slide along the channels from one position to another along the club head. In some embodiments, at least one tensioner and cable, and/or at least one magnet, may also be provided to help secure the weight or weights in various positions along the club head (e.g., along the channels).
In some embodiments, one or more of the weights described herein (e.g., 3282, 3382, 3482, 3582, 3682, 3782, 3882, 3992, 4082, 4182, 4282, 4382, 4482, 4582, 4682, 4782, 4882, 4982, 5082, 5182, 5282, 5382, 5482, 5582, 5682, 5782, 5982, 6082, 6182, 6282, 6382, 6482, 6582, 6682, 6782, 6882, 11082, 12082, and/or 13082) includes a port or hole to receive a protrusion from the club head body, or the weight includes a protrusion or screw to be received in a hole or port in the club head body (e.g., in a recessed region of the club head body). Thus, the weights may be moved from one area of the club head to another (e.g., along a cable or cables, along a channel or channels, etc.), and then positioned and held in another area along the club head via the port, hole, protrusion, or screw.
Additionally, while some of the embodiments described above are described in the context of having a recessed region and/or a recessed surface on the sole of the club head body, in some embodiments the club head body may also include a recessed region, including a recessed surface, along a crown or top of the club head. Thus, while generally described above as being primarily disposed on a sole of a club head, in some embodiments the adjustable weighting systems 3266, 3366, 3466, 3566, 3666, 3766, 3866, 3966, 4066, 4166, 4266, 4366, 4466, 4566, 4666, 4766, 4866, 4966, 5066, 5166, 5266, 5366, 5466, 5566, 5666, 5766, 5866, 5966, 6066, 6166, 6866, 11066, 12066, and/or 13066 may instead be primarily disposed on a crown, skirt, heel, toe, or toe of the club head.
Any embodiments discussed above having a protruding body can be similar to the protruding bodies illustrated in
While various protrusions are illustrated and described herein as being used to couple a weight to a club head, the specific shapes and sizes of the protrusions are not limiting. Thus, varying geometries of the protrusions (e.g. tapered protrusions, or protrusions of varying sizes and shapes) may be used, including cylindrical, rectangular, square, helical, trapezoidal, pyramid, etc. Protrusions and/or corresponding apertures may be keyed to fit one another. Some of the protrusions may be wings or tabs that extend away from the club head, or may be posts. Various other types of protrusions may also be used.
While various covers (e.g., 5074), sole plates (e.g., 5273), geometric patterns (e.g., 5070), tensioners (e.g., 4967), cables (e.g., 4969), guides (e.g., 4985), clips (e.g., 4890), turnbuckles (e.g., 4783), elongate channels (e.g., 4513), additional channels (e.g., 4493), screw apertures (e.g., 4371), and other features are described above in conjunction with a particular embodiment or embodiments, in yet other embodiments one or more of these features may be combined with a different embodiment, or with one or more of the other features described herein, on a golf club head.
While not illustrated, in some embodiments one or more of the club heads described herein may also include additional apertures that are filled with polymer glue or other material for additional weighting.
In some embodiments, a tool may be used to tighten, loosen, and/or remove one or more of the weights described herein. For example, in some embodiments one or more of the weights may include a specially designed or custom hole, or a specially designed socket, of sufficient size to engage with a portion of a tool (e.g., torque wrench) to facilitate engagement of the torque wrench with the weight. The hole or socket can be any suitable shape, such as star, triangle, square, slot, Phillips®, Torx®, POSIDRIV®, SUPADRIVE®, pentagon, hexagon, or any other suitable polygon or other keyed shape.
According to one example of the golf club head 6710 illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 6766 of the exemplary club head 6710 further comprises a first weight having a mass of 18 grams. The first weight has a height 10152 of 0.12 inch, a width 10154 of 0.97 inch, and a depth of 0.48 inch. The first weight comprises an aperture corresponding to a plurality of apertures defining the attachment locations on the club head 6710. The first weight is secured to the attachment location using a fastener positioned through the aperture in the first weight and the aperture in club head. The fastener comprises the same material or a material having a lower density than the density of the body, such that the fastener does not significantly contribute to the club head weighting.
The first weight is positionable at the first attachment location near the toe, the second attachment location near the heel, or the third attachment location between the toe and the heel. The first weight has a surface area of 0.434 inch in contact with the club head body (i.e. the recess) when the weight is coupled to any of the attachment locations. Referring to Table 1 below, the weight center of gravity 10134 of the first weight is positioned at a distance 10142 of 0.379 inch to 0.413 inch from the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 6710 when the first weight is positioned at the first, second, or third attachment location. Further, the weight center of gravity 10134 of the first weight is positioned at a distance 10138 of 3.496 inches to 4.408 inches from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 when the first weight is positioned at the first, second, or third attachment location.
Further referring to Table 1 below, the club head 6710 includes a head CG depth 10130 between 1.711 inches and 1.828 inches, and a head CG height 10132 of 0.057 inch to 0.091 inch above the head depth plane 10120. The exemplary club head 6710 further includes a moment of inertia about the x-axis Ixx between 3,465 and 3,787 g·cm2, a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy between 5,000 and 5,361 g·cm2, and a moment of inertia about the hosel axis Ihh between 8,974 and 10,084 g·cm2. The combined moment of inertia of the exemplary club head 6766 about the club head CG (i.e. the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis and the moment of inertia about the y-axis) is between 8,290 and 9,148 g·cm2. The combined moment of inertia of the exemplary club head 6766 about the club head CG and the hosel axis (i.e. the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis, the moment of inertia about the y-axis, and the moment of inertia about the hosel axis) is between 17,264 and 19,032 g·cm2.
Further referring to Table 1 below, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a depth to mass ratio of the club head CG depth to the mass of the first weight between 0.095 inch and 0.102 inch. Further, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a first inertia to mass ratio of the combined moment of inertia of the club head about the head CG to the mass of the first weight between 461 and 508 cm2. Further still, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a head CG to mass ratio of the maximum shift in head CG to the mass of the first weight of 0.011 inch/gram. Accordingly, the adjustable weighting system 6766 of the exemplary club head 6710 maximizes head CG depth, moment of inertia, and head CG shift by a user, without the use of a large and heavy weight necessitating sizeable weight structures.
Moving the weight between the first, second, and third attachment locations results in a maximum shift in the club head center of gravity of 0.20 inch. The maximum shift in center of gravity of the exemplary club head 6710 results in a total trajectory change of up to 9.3 yards (i.e. when shifting the first weight from the first to the second attachment location, or from the second to the first attachment location). Accordingly, shifting the weight from the third attachment location to the second attachment location can change the trajectory of a golf ball 4.6 yards to correct for a slice or generate a draw. Further, shifting the weight from the third attachment location to the first attachment location can change the trajectory of a golf ball 4.6 yards to correct for a hook or generate a fade.
According to another example of the golf club head 6710 illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 6766 of the exemplary club head 6710 further comprises a first weight having a mass of 18 grams. The first weight has a height 10152 of 0.12 inch, a width 10154 of 0.97 inch, and a depth of 0.48. The first weight comprises an aperture corresponding to a plurality of apertures defining the attachment locations on the club head 6710. The first weight is secured to the attachment location using a fastener positioned through the aperture in the first weight and the aperture in club head. The fastener comprises the same material or a material having a lower density than the density of the body, such that the fastener does not significantly contribute to the club head weighting.
The first weight is positionable at the first attachment location near the toe, the second attachment location near the heel, or the third attachment location between the toe and the heel. The first weight has a surface area of 0.434 inch in contact with the club head body (i.e. the recess) when the weight is coupled to any of the attachment locations. Referring to Table 2 below, the weight center of gravity 10134 of the first weight is positioned at a distance 10142 of 0.379 inch to 0.413 inch from the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 6710 when the first weight is positioned at the first, second, or third attachment location. Further, the weight center of gravity 10134 of the first weight is positioned at a distance 10138 of 3.219 inches to 4.158 inches from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 when the first weight is positioned at the first, second, or third attachment location.
Further referring to Table 2 below, the club head 6710 includes a head CG depth 10130 between 1.561 inches and 1.678 inches, and a head CG height 10132 of 0.055 inch to 0.070 inch above the head depth plane 10120. The exemplary club head 6710 further includes a moment of inertia about the x-axis Ixx between 2,961 and 3,408 g·cm2, a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy between 4,700 and 5,040 g·cm2, and a moment of inertia about the hosel axis Ihh between 8,006 and 9,116 g·cm2. The combined moment of inertia of the exemplary club head 6766 about the club head CG (i.e. the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis and the moment of inertia about the y-axis) is between 7,661 and 8,448 g·cm2. The combined moment of inertia of the exemplary club head 6766 about the club head CG and the hosel axis (i.e. the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis, the moment of inertia about the y-axis, and the moment of inertia about the hosel axis) is between 15,668 and 17,364 g·cm2.
Further referring to Table 2 below, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a depth to mass ratio of the club head CG depth to the mass of the first weight between 0.087 inch and 0.093 inch. Further, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a first inertia to mass ratio of the combined moment of inertia of the club head about the head CG to the mass of the first weight between 426 and 469 cm2. Further still, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a head CG to mass ratio of the maximum shift in head CG to the mass of the first weight of 0.011 inch/gram. Accordingly, the adjustable weighting system 6766 of the exemplary club head 6710 maximizes head CG depth, moment of inertia, and head CG shift by a user, without the use of a large and heavy weight necessitating sizeable weight structures.
Moving the weight between the first, second, and third attachment locations results in a maximum shift in the club head center of gravity of 0.20 inch. The maximum shift in center of gravity of the exemplary club head 6710 results in a total trajectory change of up to 9.3 yards (i.e. when shifting the first weight from the first to the second attachment location, or from the second to the first attachment location). Accordingly, shifting the weight from the third attachment location to the second attachment location can change the trajectory of a golf ball 4.6 yards to correct for a slice or generate a draw. Further, shifting the weight from the third attachment location to the first attachment location can change the trajectory of a golf ball 4.6 yards to correct for a hook or generate a fade.
According to one example of the golf club head 12010 illustrated in
The adjustable weighting system 12066 of the exemplary club head 12010 further comprises a first weight 12082 having a mass of 18 grams. The first weight 12082 has a height 10152 of 0.33 inch, a width 10154 of 1.18 inch, and a depth of 0.29 inch. The first weight 12082 comprises an aperture corresponding to a plurality of apertures defining the discrete attachment locations on the club head 12010. The first weight 12082 is secured to the discrete attachment location using a fastener positioned through the aperture in the first weight 12082 and the aperture in club head 12010. The fastener comprises the same material or a material having a lower density than the density of the body, such that the fastener does not significantly contribute to the club head weighting.
The first weight 12082 is positionable at the first attachment location near the toe, the second attachment location near the heel, or the third attachment location between the toe and the heel. Referring to Table 1 below, the weight center of gravity 10134 of the first weight is positioned at a distance 10142 of 0.19 inch to 0.22 inch from the rear perimeter 10136 of the club head 6710 when the first weight is positioned at the first, second, or third attachment location. Further, the weight center of gravity 10134 of the first weight is positioned at a distance 10138 of 3.26 inches to 4.41 inches from the geometric center 140 of the strike face 38 when the first weight is positioned at the first, second, or third attachment location.
Further referring to Table 1 below, the club head 6710 includes a head CG depth 10130 between 1.59 inches and 1.71 inches, and a head CG height 10132 of 0.088 inch to 0.108 inch above the head depth plane 10120. The exemplary club head 6710 further includes a moment of inertia about the x-axis Ixx between 3,090 and 3,770 g·cm2, a moment of inertia about the y-axis Iyy between 4,936 and 5,383 g·cm2, and a moment of inertia about the hosel axis Ihh between 8,815 and 10,359 g·cm2. The combined moment of inertia of the exemplary club head 6766 about the club head CG (i.e. the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis and the moment of inertia about the y-axis) is between 8,023 and 9,153 g·cm2. The combined moment of inertia of the exemplary club head 6766 about the club head CG and the hosel axis (i.e. the sum of the moment of inertia about the x-axis, the moment of inertia about the y-axis, and the moment of inertia about the hosel axis) is between 16,841 and 19,237 g·cm2.
Further referring to Table 1 below, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a depth to mass ratio of the club head CG depth to the mass of the first weight between 0.099 inch and 0.106 inch. Further, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a first inertia to mass ratio of the combined moment of inertia of the club head about the head CG to the mass of the first weight between 446 and 508 cm2. Further still, the exemplary club head having the adjustable weighting system 6766 has a head CG to mass ratio of the maximum shift in head CG to the mass of the first weight of 0.015 inch/gram. Accordingly, the adjustable weighting system 6766 of the exemplary club head 6710 maximizes head CG depth, moment of inertia, and head CG shift by a user, without the use of a large and heavy weight necessitating sizeable weight structures.
Moving the weight between the first, second, and third discrete attachment locations results in a maximum shift in the club head center of gravity of 0.27 inch. The maximum shift in center of gravity of the exemplary club head 6710 results in a total trajectory change of up to 12.4 yards (i.e. when shifting the first weight from the first to the second attachment location, or from the second to the first attachment location). Accordingly, shifting the weight from the third attachment location to the second attachment location can change the trajectory of a golf ball 6.2 yards to correct for a slice or generate a draw. Further, shifting the weight from the third attachment location to the first attachment location can change the trajectory of a golf ball 6.2 yards to correct for a hook or generate a fade.
Clause 1: A golf club head comprising a club head body having a toe end, a heel end located opposite the toe end, a crown, a sole located opposite the crown, a strike face, and a back end located opposite the strike face, and an adjustable weighting system including a plurality of cylindrical protruding bodies extending from an outer surface of the club head along at least a portion of the sole, and a plurality of weights, each weight configured for coupling to one of the plurality of cylindrical protruding bodies.
Clause 2: The golf club head of clause 1, wherein the outer surface includes a plurality of raised portions, and wherein at least some of the plurality of cylindrical protruding bodies extend from the plurality of raised portions.
Clause 3: The golf club head of clause 1, wherein the outer surface includes a plurality of recessed surfaces, wherein at least some of the plurality of cylindrical protruding bodies extend from the plurality of recessed surfaces.
Clause 4: A golf club head comprising a club head body having an outer surface, the outer surface further defining a recessed portion; and an adjustable weighting system including a rib extending from the recessed portion, the rib including a slot, and a weight configured for engagement with the slot.
Clause 5: The golf club head of clause 4, wherein weight includes a post, wherein the post is configured for engagement with the slot.
Clause 6: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having a toe end, a heel end located opposite the toe end, a crown, a sole located opposite the crown, a strike face, and a trailing edge that extends between the toe end and the heel end and defines an intersection between the sole and the crown, wherein an outer surface is defined on the club head body along a portion of the sole adjacent the trailing edge, the outer surface including a recessed portion; and an adjustable weighting system having a plurality of protruding bodies, each protruding body extending from the recessed portion and configured to removably secure a weight.
Clause 7: The golf club head of clause 6, wherein each of the plurality of protruding bodies is cylindrical in shape.
Clause 8: The golf club head of clause 6, wherein one of the plurality of protruding bodies is a different size than another of the plurality of protruding bodies.
Clause 9: The golf club head of clause 6, wherein the recessed portion comprises a first surface and a second surface.
Clause 10: The golf club head of clause 9, wherein the first surface is perpendicular to the second surface.
Clause 11: The golf club head of clause 9, wherein the first surface is parallel to the second surface.
Clause 12: The golf club head of clause 9, wherein at least one of the plurality of protruding bodies is positioned on the first surface, and wherein at least another of the plurality of protruding bodies is positioned on the second surface.
Clause 13: The golf club head of clause 12, wherein three protruding bodies are positioned on the first surface and a single protruding body is positioned on the second surface.
Clause 14: The golf club head of clause 13, wherein the single protruding body is of a different size than each of the three protruding bodies.
Clause 15: The golf club head of clause 6, wherein the recessed portion extends from the toe or toe end to the heel or heel end generally in an arcuate configuration.
Clause 16: The golf club head of clause 6, wherein the recessed portion includes a first portion, a second portion, and a third portion that all intersect with one another at an intersection region, wherein the first portion extends from the intersection region toward the toe end, wherein the second portion extends from the intersection region toward the heel end, and wherein the third portion extends from the intersection region inwardly toward a center of the sole.
Clause 17: The golf club head of clause 16, wherein the recessed portion defines a channel adjacent the trailing edge.
Clause 18: The golf club head of clause 16, further comprising a plurality of differently-sized weights, each configured for coupling to one of the plurality of protruding bodies.
Clause 19: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having an outer surface; and an adjustable weighting system including a plurality of protruding bodies extending outwardly from the outer surface, each protruding body configured to removably secure a weight.
Clause 20: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having an outer surface; an adjustable weighting system including a plurality of protruding bodies extending outwardly from the outer surface; and a cover configured for coupling to the club head body and overlying at least one of the plurality of protruding bodies.
Clause 21: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having an outer surface; and an adjustable weighting system including a plurality of protruding bodies or notches along a portion of the outer surface, a cable, a tensioner operable to increase or decrease tension in the cable, and at least one weight coupled to the cable and securable to or within one of the protruding bodies or notches via tension in the cable.
Clause 22: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having an outer surface; and an adjustable weighting system including a plurality of protruding bodies or notches positioned along a portion of the outer surface, a cable, a tensioner operable to increase or decrease tension in the cable, and at least one weight having a groove along an outer surface thereof to receive the cable such that the cable presses the at least one weight against one of the protruding bodies or notches upon activation of the tensioner to increase tension in the cable.
Clause 23: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having an outer surface; and an adjustable weighting system including a plurality of protruding bodies or notches positioned along a portion of the outer surface, a cable, a tensioner operable to increase or decrease tension in the cable, and at least one weight having an aperture therethrough, wherein the cable extends through the aperture such that the weight may be adjusted along the cable upon activation of the tensioner to decrease tension in the cable and fixed relative to the outer surface upon activation of the tensioner to increase tension in the cable.
Clause 24: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having an outer surface; and an adjustable weighting system including a plurality of protruding bodies or notches positioned along a portion of the outer surface, a cable, a tensioner operable to increase or decrease tension in the cable, and at least one weight fixed at an end of the cable, wherein the tensioner is configured to retract the cable to secure the weight against one of the protruding bodies or within one of the notches.
Clause 25: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having a toe end, a heel end located opposite the toe end, a crown, a sole located opposite the crown, a strike face, and a perimeter positioned at a junction between the crown and the sole extending from near the heel end to near the toe end; and an adjustable weighting system positioned on the sole, the perimeter, or a combination thereof, the adjustable weighting system including: a plurality of discrete attachment locations; and one or more weights, each having a weight center of gravity, wherein each weight is configured to be coupled to one of the plurality of discrete attachment locations, and each weight is configured to be moveable between the plurality of discrete attachment locations to shift a center of gravity of the club head; wherein: the one or more weights are positioned such that the weight center of gravity of each weight is positioned within 0.50 inch of the perimeter of the club head when the weight is coupled to at least one of the discrete attachment locations; the one or more weights are positioned such that the weight center of gravity of each weight protrudes from an external contour of the sole, or is inset from the external contour of the sole by a distance less than 0.125 inch; and a combined moment of inertia of the club head about the club head center of gravity, defined as the sum of a crown-to-sole moment of inertia and a heel-to-toe moment of inertia, is greater than 8,000 g·cm2.
Clause 26: The golf club head of clause 25, wherein the plurality of discrete attachment locations are selected from the group consisting of: a plurality of protruding bodies, a plurality of recesses, a plurality of apertures, a plurality of notches, a plurality of tabs, a plurality of cutout regions, a plurality of ribs, a plurality of grooves, and a plurality of hooks.
Clause 27: The golf club head of clause 25, wherein the one or more weights comprise a first weight between 10 grams and 20 grams, and the first weight is the heaviest of the one or more weights.
Clause 28: The golf club head of clause 27, wherein the one or more weights further comprise a second weight between 0.25 grams and 10 grams.
Clause 29: The golf club head of clause 25, wherein the plurality of attachment locations are positioned on a recessed portion of the club head.
Clause 30: The golf club head of clause 29, wherein the recessed portion is positioned on the sole, is arcuate in shape, and generally follows the contour of the perimeter of the club head.
Clause 31: The golf club head of clause 29, wherein the recessed portion comprises a maximum depth of 0.25 inch.
Clause 32: The golf club head of clause 29, wherein the plurality of discrete attachment locations comprise a plurality of apertures configured to receive a fastener.
Clause 33: The golf club head of clause 25, wherein the plurality of attachment locations are positioned in a channel extending in a direction from near the toe end to near the heel end of the club head.
Clause 34: The golf club head of clause 33, wherein the maximum depth of the channel is 0.25 inch.
Clause 35: The golf club head of clause 33, wherein the depth of the channel varies from near the toe end to near the heel end of the club head.
Clause 36: The golf club head of clause 33, wherein the width of the channel varies from near the toe end to near the heel end of the club head.
Clause 37: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having a toe end, a heel end located opposite the toe end, a crown, a sole located opposite the crown, a strike face, and a perimeter positioned at a junction between the crown and the sole extending from near the heel end to near the toe end; and an adjustable weighting system positioned on the sole, the perimeter, or a combination thereof, the adjustable weighting system including: a plurality of discrete attachment locations; and a cable, a tensioner operable to increase or decrease tension in the cable, and one or more weights coupled to the cable and securable to or within one of the plurality of discrete attachment locations, wherein each weight is configured to be moveable between the plurality of discrete attachment locations to change a center of gravity of the club head, and each of the one or more weights comprise a weight center of gravity, wherein: the one or more weights are positioned such that the weight center of gravity of each weight is positioned within 0.50 inch of the perimeter of the club head, when the weight is coupled to at least one of the discrete attachment locations; the one or more weights are positioned such that the weight center of gravity of each weight protrudes from an external contour of the sole, or is inset from the external contour of the sole by a distance less than 0.125 inch; and a combined moment of inertia of the club head about the club head center of gravity, defined as the sum of a crown-to-sole moment of inertia and a heel-to-toe moment of inertia, is greater than 8,000 g·cm2.
Clause 38: The golf club head of clause 37, wherein the plurality of discrete attachment locations are selected from the group consisting of: a plurality of protruding bodies, a plurality of recesses, a plurality of apertures, a plurality of notches, a plurality of tabs, a plurality of cutout regions, a plurality of ribs, a plurality of grooves, and a plurality of hooks.
Clause 39: The golf club head of clause 37, wherein the one or more weights comprise a first weight between 10 grams and 20 grams, and the first weight is the heaviest of the one or more weights.
Clause 40: The golf club head of clause 39, wherein the one or more weights further comprise a second weight between 0.25 grams and 10 grams.
Clause 41: The golf club head of clause 37, wherein the one or more weights has a groove along an outer surface thereof to receive the cable such that the cable presses the weight against one of the attachment locations upon activation of the tensioner to increase tension in the cable.
Clause 42: The golf club head of clause 37, wherein the one or more weights has an aperture therethrough, wherein the cable extends through the aperture such that the weight may be adjusted along the cable upon activation of the tensioner to decrease tension in the cable.
Clause 43: The golf club head of clause 37, wherein the one or more weights is fixed at an end of the cable, wherein the tensioner is configured to retract the cable to secure the weight against one of the discrete attachment locations.
Clause 44: A golf club head comprising: a club head body having a toe end, a heel end located opposite the toe end, a crown, a sole located opposite the crown, a strike face, and a perimeter positioned at a junction between the crown and the sole extending from near the heel end to near the toe end; and an adjustable weighting system positioned on the sole, the perimeter, or a combination thereof, the adjustable weighting system including: a plurality of discrete attachment locations; and one or more weights, each having a weight center of gravity, wherein each weight is configured to be coupled to one of the plurality of discrete attachment locations, and each weight is configured to be moveable between the plurality of discrete attachment locations to shift a center of gravity of the club head; wherein: the one or more weights are positioned such that the weight center of gravity of each weight is positioned within 0.50 inch of the perimeter of the club head, when the weight is coupled to at least one of the discrete attachment locations; a combined moment of inertia of the club head about the club head center of gravity, defined as the sum of a crown-to-sole moment of inertia and a heel-to-toe moment of inertia, is greater than 8,000 g·cm2.
Clause 45: The golf club head of clause 44, wherein the one or more weights are positioned such that the weight center of gravity of each weight protrudes from an external contour of the sole, or is inset from the external contour of the sole by a distance less than 0.125 inch.
Replacement of one or more claimed elements constitutes reconstruction and not repair. Additionally, benefits, other advantages, and solutions to problems have been described with regard to specific embodiments. The benefits, advantages, solutions to problems, and any element or elements that may cause any benefit, advantage, or solution to occur or become more pronounced, however, are not to be construed as critical, required, or essential features or elements of any or all of the claims, unless such benefits, advantages, solutions, or elements are expressly stated in such claims.
As the rules to golf may change from time to time (e.g., new regulations may be adopted or old rules may be eliminated or modified by golf standard organizations and/or governing bodies such as the United States Golf Association (USGA), the Royal and Ancient Golf Club of St. Andrews (R&A), etc.), golf equipment related to the apparatus, methods, and articles of manufacture described herein may be conforming or non-conforming to the rules of golf at any particular time. Accordingly, golf equipment related to the apparatus, methods, and articles of manufacture described herein may be advertised, offered for sale, and/or sold as conforming or non-conforming golf equipment. The apparatus, methods, and articles of manufacture described herein are not limited in this regard.
While the above examples may be described in connection with a wood-type golf club, the apparatus, methods, and articles of manufacture described herein may be applicable to a variety of types of golf clubs including drivers, fairway woods, hybrids, crossovers, or any hollow body type golf clubs. Alternatively, the apparatus, methods, and articles of manufacture described herein may be applicable to other types of sports equipment such as a hockey stick, a tennis racket, a fishing pole, a ski pole, etc.
Moreover, embodiments and limitations disclosed herein are not dedicated to the public under the doctrine of dedication if the embodiments and/or limitations: (1) are not expressly claimed in the claims; and (2) are or are potentially equivalents of express elements and/or limitations in the claims under the doctrine of equivalents.
Although the invention has been described in detail with reference to certain preferred embodiments, variations and modifications exist within the scope and spirit of one or more independent aspects of the invention as described.
This is a continuation in part of PCT Appl. No. PCT/US2018/000181, filed on Aug. 15, 2018, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/545,770, filed on Aug. 15, 2017, and U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/628,803, filed on Feb. 9, 2018. This further is a continuation in part of PCT Appl. No PCT/US2017/034586, filed on May 25, 2017, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/484,256, filed on Apr. 11, 2017, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/472,742, filed on Mar. 17, 2017, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/456,724, filed on Feb. 9, 2017, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/448,864, filed on Jan. 20, 2017, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/425,553, filed on Nov. 22, 2016, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/377,465, filed on Aug. 19, 2016, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/357,907, filed on Jul. 1, 2016, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/348,645, filed on Jun. 10, 2016, U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/346,701, filed on Jun. 7, 2016, and U.S. Provisional Patent Appl. No. 62/341,542, filed on May 25, 2016. The contents of all of the above described applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 62628803 | Feb 2018 | US | |
| 62545770 | Aug 2017 | US | |
| 62484256 | Apr 2017 | US | |
| 62472742 | Mar 2017 | US | |
| 62456724 | Feb 2017 | US | |
| 62448864 | Jan 2017 | US | |
| 62425553 | Nov 2016 | US | |
| 62377465 | Aug 2016 | US | |
| 62357907 | Jul 2016 | US | |
| 62348645 | Jun 2016 | US | |
| 62346701 | Jun 2016 | US | |
| 62341542 | May 2016 | US |
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Parent | PCT/US2018/000181 | Aug 2018 | US |
| Child | 16185923 | US | |
| Parent | PCT/US2017/034586 | May 2017 | US |
| Child | PCT/US2018/000181 | US |
